home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
Text File | 1995-05-12 | 410.2 KB | 9,292 lines |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄ ▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄ ▄▄▄▄ ▄▄▄▄▄▄ ▄▄▄▄▄▄ ▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
- ░ ▀▄ ░ ▀▄ ░ █ ░ ▀▄ ░ ▀▄░ █
- ▀▀▀█ █▀▀▀▀▀▀█▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▄ ▓▀▀▀█▀█ █▀▄ █ ▀▀▀█ ▀▀▀█▀▄ █ ▀▀▀█▀█ █ █ █▀▀▀▀▀█▀▀▀
- ░ █ ░ ▓ ░▀▀▀▀▀ ▄▀░ █ ░ █ ░ █ ░ █ ░ █ ░ █ ░ █▄░ █ ░ █░ ▓
- ░ █ ░ █▀▀ ░ ▄▀ ░ █ ░ █ ░ █ ▒ █ ▒ █ ▒ █ ▒ █ █ ░ █▒ █▀▀
- ▒ █ ▒ ▀▄▄▄ ▒ ▄▄ ▀▄ ▒ █ ▒ █ ▒ █ ▒ █ ▒ █ ▒ █ ▒ █▀▒ █ ▒ █▒ ▀▄▄▄▄▄
- ▓ █ ▓ ▓ ▓ ▓ █ ▓ ▓ █ ▓ █ ▓ █ ▓ █ ▓ █ ▓ █ ▓ █ ▓ █ ▓ █▓ ▓
- ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀ ▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀
-
-
- T E R M I N A T E
- ─────────────────
-
-
- Version 1.51
-
- Copyright 1992-94 by Strathrory System Limited
- Worldwide distributor SerWiz Comm
-
- All Rights Reserved
-
-
-
-
- TABLE OF CONTENTS
-
-
- Introduction to the Final Terminal .................................. 1
- What is a terminal program? ......................................... 1
- Online help ......................................................... 1
- TERMINAT ? will give you a list of all available parameters ......... 1
- Editing input fields ................................................ 1
- Mouse ............................................................... 2
- SHIFT-ESC Runtime information ....................................... 2
- Alt-A SmartNote ..................................................... 3
- SmartNote commands ................................................. 3
- SmartNote cursor-movement commands ................................. 4
- Alt-B (Shift-CursorUp) Scrollback buffer ............................ 4
- Alt-C Clear Screen .................................................. 4
- Alt-D Dialing directory ............................................. 5
- Alt-E Local echo .................................................... 5
- Alt-F The File Manager .............................................. 5
- Alt-G Scripts ....................................................... 5
- Alt-H Hangup ........................................................ 5
- Alt-I Screen image .................................................. 5
- Alt-J DOS-Shell ..................................................... 5
- Alt-K String grabber ................................................ 5
- Alt-L Capture file .................................................. 5
- Alt-M Miscellaneous functions ....................................... 6
- Greenwich Mean Time ................................................ 7
- Privacy Insurance .................................................. 7
- Prevent annoying phonecalls ....................................... 7
- Prevent burglary .................................................. 7
- Alt-N Send username ................................................. 8
- Alt-O Configuration ................................................. 8
- Alt-P Adjust comm. parameters ....................................... 8
- Alt-Q Quit autologin ................................................ 8
- Alt-R Select download path .......................................... 8
- Alt-S Send password ................................................. 8
- Alt-T Terminal emulation ............................................ 8
- Alt-U System information ............................................ 8
- Alt-V VISIBLE FAST (tm) access menu ................................. 8
- Alt-W Translation editor ............................................ 9
- Alt-Y Chat mode ..................................................... 10
- Alt-X Exit Terminate ................................................ 10
- Alt-Z Quick reference menu .......................................... 10
- Alt-= Load a keyboard table ......................................... 10
- Ctrl-End Break ...................................................... 10
- ScrollLock Doorway mode ............................................. 10
- PageDown Download ................................................... 11
- PageUp Upload ....................................................... 11
- Alt-1 Sound ......................................................... 11
- Alt-2 ANSI music .................................................... 11
- Alt-3 Statusline .................................................... 11
- Alt-4 Usagelog ...................................................... 11
- Alt-5 Add linefeed .................................................. 11
- Alt-6 IEMSI ......................................................... 11
- Alt-7 Ctrl-Status ................................................... 11
- Alt-8 Alt-Status .................................................... 12
- Alt-9 Ctrl-Shift-Status ............................................. 12
- Alt-0 Auto capture .................................................. 12
- Alt-F1 Status left .................................................. 12
- Alt-F2 Status right ................................................. 12
- Alt-F3 Pause function ............................................... 12
-
- Alt-F4 IEMSI information ............................................ 13
- Alt-F5 File tagger .................................................. 13
- Alt-F6 Tagmenu ...................................................... 13
- Alt-F7 Point system ................................................. 13
- Alt-F8 Hostmode ..................................................... 13
- Alt-F9 History strings .............................................. 13
- Alt-F10 CD Audio player ............................................. 13
- Alt-F11 External editor ............................................. 14
- Alt-F12 Fax manager. ................................................ 14
- NETWORK ............................................................. 14
- Terminate Thesaurus ................................................. 14
-
- Configurating Terminate ................................................ 15
-
- Command line switches ............................................... 17
- /CONFIG ............................................................ 17
- /F ................................................................. 17
- /HOST .............................................................. 17
- /POINT ............................................................. 17
- /C:filename.ext .................................................... 17
- /NOCARD ............................................................ 17
- /SKIP .............................................................. 17
- /DISK .............................................................. 17
- /BUF:xxx ........................................................... 18
- /NOXMS ............................................................. 18
- /DIAL:xxx .......................................................... 18
- /BOSS[:x] .......................................................... 18
- /CALL:node/name .................................................... 18
- /FIX ............................................................... 18
- /SCRLEN:xxx /SCRCOL:xxx ............................................ 18
- /DEVICE:x .......................................................... 18
- /PORT:x ............................................................ 18
- /BAUD:x ............................................................ 18
- /TASK:x ............................................................ 18
- /MODE:x ............................................................ 19
- /UPG ............................................................... 19
- /NOIMPORT .......................................................... 19
- Errorlevels ......................................................... 19
- Fatal errors 255 ............................................. 19
- Overlay errors 254 ............................................. 19
- Password error 253 ............................................. 19
- Lock error 252 ............................................. 19
- Out of diskspace 251 ............................................. 19
- Inactivity 250 ............................................. 19
- Semaphore exit 249 ............................................. 19
- Hostmode shutdown 248 ............................................. 19
- No errors 0 ............................................. 20
-
- Screen and Colors ...................................................... 21
-
- Colors .............................................................. 21
- Palette ............................................................ 21
- Auto palette ........................................................ 22
- Windows sound ....................................................... 22
- Exploding windows ................................................... 22
- Direct writes ....................................................... 22
- Snow checking ....................................................... 22
- Screen blanker ...................................................... 22
- Show snakes ......................................................... 22
- VGA Fadeout ......................................................... 22
-
- Center screen ....................................................... 22
- Screen size ......................................................... 22
- ├─Start mode ........................................................ 22
- ├─Other mode ........................................................ 22
- └─Exit mode ........................................................ 22
- Big phonebook ....................................................... 23
- Force CP-850 ........................................................ 23
- Find textmodes ...................................................... 23
- Use intensity ....................................................... 23
- Only low ASCII ...................................................... 23
- Use SND files ....................................................... 23
-
- Communications ......................................................... 24
-
- Maximum baud rates .................................................. 24
- When to use a fast 16550A serialchip with FIFO buffer ............... 24
- Device setup ........................................................ 25
- Serial interface .................................................... 25
- UART/Serial Direct serial chips ............................ 25
- Interrupt 14h Via BIOS int 14h max 9600 baud ................. 25
- Fossil Resident serial devices, like X00/BNU .......... 25
- Digiboard Very fast intelligent multiport adapter. ....... 25
- Comport ............................................................. 25
- Device name ......................................................... 25
- Baudrate ............................................................ 25
- Lock port ........................................................... 25
- Databits / Stopbits / Parity ........................................ 25
- Databits ............................................................ 25
- Stopbits ............................................................ 26
- Parity .............................................................. 26
- None No parity is added, default .................................. 26
- Even A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always even ... 26
- Odd A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always odd .... 26
- Mark A parity bit of value one is always added .................... 26
- Space A parity bit of value zero is always added ................... 26
- Phonebook ........................................................... 26
- Costfile ............................................................ 26
- Receive buffer size Transmit buffer size ........................... 26
- Software flow control (Xon/Xoff) .................................... 26
- Hardware flow control (CTS/RTS) ..................................... 27
- Hardware flow control (DSR/DTR) ..................................... 27
- Use 16550 fifo if available ......................................... 27
- Keep 16550 fifo on in shell ......................................... 27
- RTS low while writing ............................................... 27
- Auto RTS low trigger ................................................ 27
- Carrier detect mask ................................................. 27
- Init string ......................................................... 27
- Restore port on close ............................................... 27
- Close port in shell ................................................. 28
- Configure comports .................................................. 28
- Check IRQ ........................................................... 29
- Set default values .................................................. 29
- Auto installation ................................................... 29
-
- General options ........................................................ 30
-
- General options 1 ................................................... 30
- Swap method ......................................................... 30
- Swap when shelling .................................................. 30
- Warning days ........................................................ 30
-
- ScrollBack buffer kb ................................................ 30
- Time format ......................................................... 31
- Country code ........................................................ 31
- Pause time / char ................................................... 31
- Minimum diskspace ................................................... 31
- Tag char ............................................................ 31
- Edit background ..................................................... 31
- Online warn minutes ................................................. 31
- Information time .................................................... 31
- Max log size kb ..................................................... 31
- Inactivity seconds .................................................. 31
- Audio control ....................................................... 31
- Auto password ....................................................... 32
- Separators .......................................................... 32
- Thousand : . , ........................................ 32
- Decimal : , . ........................................ 32
- Date : - / ........................................ 32
- Time : . : ........................................ 32
- Filefinder drives / Scan drives ..................................... 32
- Release buffer ...................................................... 32
- Menu background ..................................................... 32
- General options 2 ................................................... 32
- External support .................................................... 33
- !P ................................................................. 33
- !C ................................................................. 33
- !0 ................................................................. 33
- !E ................................................................. 33
- !M ................................................................. 33
- !W ................................................................. 33
- !B ................................................................. 33
- !L ................................................................. 34
- !F ................................................................. 34
- !CD ................................................................ 34
- !25,!30,!43,!50 .................................................... 34
-
- Toggles ................................................................ 35
-
- Blind support ....................................................... 35
- Deaf Support ........................................................ 35
- Sound ............................................................... 35
- Connect alarm ....................................................... 35
- Transfer then beep .................................................. 35
- Key click ........................................................... 35
- Opening screen ...................................................... 35
- Closing screen ...................................................... 36
- Ask start device .................................................... 36
- Start in phone ...................................................... 36
- Start in top ........................................................ 36
- Ask phone ........................................................... 36
- Phonebook after ..................................................... 36
- Jump back to phone .................................................. 36
- Dialer auto untag ................................................... 36
- Quick dialing bar ................................................... 36
- Return aborts ....................................................... 36
- Show big CONNECT .................................................... 36
- Auto save config .................................................... 36
- Auto save history ................................................... 36
- Auto update baud .................................................... 37
- Backup cfg/phone .................................................... 37
- Second backup ....................................................... 37
-
- Save before dial .................................................... 37
- Save scrollback ..................................................... 37
- Save tagfile ........................................................ 37
- Open logfile ........................................................ 37
- Auto-open capture ................................................... 37
- Overwrite capture ................................................... 37
- Append capture ...................................................... 38
- Ctrl in capture ..................................................... 38
- Capture keystroke ................................................... 38
- Special Capture ..................................................... 38
- Hide passwords ...................................................... 38
- Password checking ................................................... 38
- Crypt cfg/fon ....................................................... 38
- Ask at Alt-X ........................................................ 38
- Ask at Alt-H ........................................................ 38
- Show when Ctrl ...................................................... 38
- Show when Alt ....................................................... 38
- Show when Ctrl+Sh ................................................... 39
- Baud in status ...................................................... 39
- Mouse ............................................................... 39
- Enhanced keyboard ................................................... 39
- Auto ANSI ........................................................... 39
- Flush Cache ......................................................... 39
- Import descript. .................................................... 39
- RegInfo bright ...................................................... 39
- Select sort ......................................................... 39
- Shell information ................................................... 39
- Tag advance ......................................................... 39
- Transfer info ....................................................... 39
- Transfer slice ...................................................... 40
- Wrap word in chat ................................................... 40
- EMSI debug info ..................................................... 40
- Alt-K infoscreen .................................................... 40
- Reset toggles ....................................................... 40
-
- Modem and dialing ...................................................... 41
-
- Install modem ....................................................... 42
- Including your own modem in Terminate's database .................... 42
- Init strings ........................................................ 43
- Send all ........................................................... 43
- Dial prefix/suffix .................................................. 44
- Exit string ......................................................... 44
- Connect string ...................................................... 44
- No connect strings .................................................. 44
- Hang-up ............................................................. 45
- Ring/Ok string ...................................................... 45
- Dial time ........................................................... 45
- Dial cancel string .................................................. 45
- Redial timers ....................................................... 46
- Auto-answer string .................................................. 46
- Auto answer ......................................................... 46
- Baud change ......................................................... 46
- Modem string delay .................................................. 46
- Force initstring .................................................... 46
- RS-232C INTERFACE ................................................... 47
- HAYES ............................................................... 48
-
- Filenames and paths .................................................... 51
-
-
- Download manager .................................................... 52
- Upload directory .................................................... 52
- Script directory .................................................... 52
- Translation file .................................................... 52
- Phonebook directory ................................................. 52
- Capture directory ................................................... 53
- Capture file ........................................................ 53
- Log file ............................................................ 53
- Editor filename ..................................................... 53
- Line command ........................................................ 53
- Viewer filename ..................................................... 53
- The internal lister ................................................ 53
- Protocol directory .................................................. 53
- Shell directory ..................................................... 54
- Swap file ........................................................... 54
- Utility directory ................................................... 54
- Manual directory .................................................... 54
- Run after download Run after upload ................................ 54
- Qwk reply files ..................................................... 54
- Semaphore directory ................................................. 54
- Exit file ........................................................... 54
- Filelist manager .................................................... 55
-
- Protocols .............................................................. 56
-
- Default ............................................................. 56
- Allow auto .......................................................... 56
- Internal protocols .................................................. 56
- Enable protocols ................................................... 56
- CPS adjust ......................................................... 57
- Hangup after time .................................................. 57
- Hangup default ..................................................... 57
- Zmodem/ZedZap: ..................................................... 57
- Allow CRC-32 ...................................................... 57
- Allow recovery .................................................... 57
- Check file date ................................................... 57
- Touch file ........................................................ 58
- Increase filename ................................................. 58
- Always overwrite .................................................. 58
- Zmodem signature .................................................. 58
- Auto upload ....................................................... 58
- ASCII send/receive ................................................. 58
- Strip high bit .................................................... 58
- Remote abort char ................................................. 58
- Local echo ........................................................ 59
- Blank line -=> 1 Space ............................................ 59
- Line pacing ....................................................... 59
- Character pacing .................................................. 59
- CR translation LF translation .................................... 59
- External protocols .................................................. 59
- Protocol name ...................................................... 60
- Information ........................................................ 60
- [Path]+Filename .................................................... 60
- Ask at downloads ................................................... 60
- Change to UL dir ................................................... 60
- Change to DL dir ................................................... 61
- Batch .............................................................. 61
- Hotkey ............................................................. 61
- Upload parameters / Download param. ................................ 61
- Auto-download ...................................................... 61
-
- Signature Signature hex ........................................... 62
- Transfering files ................................................... 62
- Total / Costs ...................................................... 62
- Disk space ......................................................... 62
- Activity ........................................................... 62
- Path ............................................................... 63
- Hangup after ....................................................... 63
- Skip rest of file .................................................. 63
- RTS low while writing .............................................. 63
- Batch upload PgUp,Alt-B ............................................. 63
-
- Emulations ............................................................. 64
-
- Default terminal .................................................... 64
- Setup terminal ...................................................... 64
- Emulation .......................................................... 65
- Comment ............................................................ 65
- Keyboard file ...................................................... 65
- Scroll screen ...................................................... 65
- Local echo ......................................................... 65
- Add linefeed ....................................................... 65
- Strip high ......................................................... 65
- Erase backspace .................................................... 66
- Ignore null ........................................................ 66
- Statusline ......................................................... 66
- ANSI music ......................................................... 66
- Edit keyboard ....................................................... 66
- @DIAL 5 6 7 8 9 10 .................................................. 67
-
- Host mode .............................................................. 68
-
- Host init-string .................................................... 68
- Open system ......................................................... 68
- Send path ........................................................... 68
- Receive path ........................................................ 68
- Shut down pwd ....................................................... 68
- Allow sound ......................................................... 68
- Ring count .......................................................... 69
- Callback wait ....................................................... 69
- Fax receive ......................................................... 69
- Fax init ............................................................ 69
- Fax answer .......................................................... 69
- Fax internal ........................................................ 69
- Fax command ......................................................... 69
- External 1 External 2 External 3 .................................. 70
- Using the hostmode .................................................. 70
- Esc ................................................................. 70
- Alt-H Hangup ........................................................ 71
- Alt-Y Yell .......................................................... 71
- Alt-J DOS ........................................................... 71
- (C)hat .............................................................. 71
- (D)ownload .......................................................... 71
- (E)rase ............................................................. 71
- (F)iles ............................................................. 71
- (G)oodbye ........................................................... 71
- (H)D-free ........................................................... 71
- (I)nfo-HD ........................................................... 71
- (L)ocate ............................................................ 72
- (M)essage ........................................................... 72
- (N)ew dir ........................................................... 72
-
- (R)ead .............................................................. 72
- (S)hutdown .......................................................... 72
- (T)ype .............................................................. 72
- (U)pload ............................................................ 72
- (1),(2),(3) ......................................................... 72
-
- Auto login ............................................................. 73
-
- Script delay ........................................................ 73
- Login timeout ....................................................... 73
- Login strings ....................................................... 73
- Mini Scripts ........................................................ 74
-
- Users / IEMSI setup .................................................... 75
-
- Edit user profiles .................................................. 75
- Username ............................................................ 76
- Password ............................................................ 76
- Prg/host Pwd ........................................................ 76
- Address ............................................................. 76
- Comment ............................................................. 76
- Host settings ....................................................... 76
- Access ............................................................. 76
- Callback ........................................................... 76
- Dial prefix ........................................................ 76
- Phone number ....................................................... 77
- User IEMSI settings ................................................. 77
- IEMSI ............................................................... 77
- Info time ........................................................... 77
- Location ............................................................ 77
- Phone # ............................................................. 77
- Prg. Pwd (Program password) ......................................... 77
- Birthday ............................................................ 77
- Security ............................................................ 78
- Configuration ...................................................... 78
- Phonebook .......................................................... 78
- Point system ....................................................... 78
- File manager ....................................................... 78
- Screen blanker ..................................................... 78
- System Searcher .................................................... 78
- Security menu ...................................................... 79
- Encrypt logfile .................................................... 80
- Secondary logfile ................................................. 80
- Password .......................................................... 80
- Decrypt/View logfile .............................................. 80
- Network lock ....................................................... 80
- Lock .............................................................. 80
- EXE ............................................................... 80
- KEY ............................................................... 80
- CFG ............................................................... 80
-
- The Pointsystem ........................................................ 82
-
- Poll ................................................................ 83
- Request ............................................................. 83
- Netmail ............................................................. 83
- Echomail ............................................................ 84
- Hold ................................................................ 84
- Snailmail ........................................................... 84
- Alt-O,N ............................................................. 85
-
- Main address ........................................................ 85
- Boss setup .......................................................... 85
- Dial ............................................................... 85
- Boss phone ......................................................... 85
- Boss device ........................................................ 86
- Boss prefix ........................................................ 86
- Boss password ...................................................... 86
- Boss synch ......................................................... 86
- Boss autodial ...................................................... 86
- Descriptions ........................................................ 86
- Redial tries ........................................................ 86
- Dial prefix ......................................................... 86
- Allow ZedZap ........................................................ 86
- Ask device .......................................................... 86
- Pop Simulate ........................................................ 87
- Zone match .......................................................... 87
- Handshake ........................................................... 87
- Inbound ............................................................. 87
- Outbound ............................................................ 87
- Nodelist 1 Nodelist 2 Nodelist 3 .................................. 87
- Password file ....................................................... 87
- Phone convert ....................................................... 87
- Modem strings ....................................................... 88
- Mail editor ......................................................... 88
- Import .............................................................. 88
- Export .............................................................. 88
- After mail .......................................................... 88
- Alt-F7 Using the point system ....................................... 89
- The outbound window ................................................. 89
- Call Boss ........................................................... 90
- Call system ......................................................... 90
- Send files .......................................................... 90
- File requests ....................................................... 90
- Kill mail (DELete) .................................................. 91
- Auto request { Only in registered version } ......................... 91
- Pick up mail ........................................................ 91
- Send AKA's .......................................................... 91
- Zoom mail ........................................................... 92
- Main address ........................................................ 92
- Send message ........................................................ 92
- Change mail ......................................................... 92
- Mail editor ......................................................... 92
- Import .............................................................. 92
- Export .............................................................. 92
- V View logfile ...................................................... 92
- Manual { Only in registered version } ............................... 92
-
- Cost management ........................................................ 94
-
- Calculate costs ..................................................... 94
- Cost file 1 Cost file 2 Cost file 3 ............................... 94
- Show at connect ..................................................... 94
- Show costs after .................................................... 94
- Start at once ....................................................... 94
- Currency string ..................................................... 95
- Decimalpoint ........................................................ 95
- Pay by period ....................................................... 95
- Max costs ........................................................... 95
- Max costs per day ................................................... 95
- Cost editor ......................................................... 96
-
- Phone # ............................................................ 96
- Days:MTWTFSS ....................................................... 96
- Hours .............................................................. 96
- Costs in units/minute / Add Y units every X second ................. 96
- Start .............................................................. 97
- Connect ............................................................ 97
- External editor ..................................................... 97
- 2. currency string .................................................. 97
- 2. currency calc. ................................................... 97
- 2. calculator ....................................................... 97
-
- The Phonebook .......................................................... 98
-
- Insert .............................................................. 98
- Delete .............................................................. 98
- A Add new entry ..................................................... 98
- D (RETURN) Dial number(s) ........................................... 98
- Add 15 seconds ..................................................... 99
- Untag entry ........................................................ 99
- Edit entry ......................................................... 99
- Retry .............................................................. 99
- Space=cycle ........................................................ 99
- Return=abort ESC=hangup/abort ...................................... 99
- M Manual dial ....................................................... 100
- F Find entry ........................................................ 100
- SPACE Tag/untag ..................................................... 100
- + Tag all ........................................................... 100
- - Untag all ......................................................... 100
- * Invert all ........................................................ 100
- S Sort menu ......................................................... 101
- I Import ............................................................ 101
- BBSlist ............................................................ 102
- Import from nodelists .............................................. 102
- Import/Export comma separated files ................................ 102
- Export: Phonebook to printer/textfile .............................. 102
- P Change phonebook .................................................. 102
- O Other functions ................................................... 102
- G Global changes .................................................... 104
- V Save phonebook .................................................... 104
- L Voicecall ......................................................... 105
- C Copy menu ......................................................... 105
- T (Alt-L) Edit capture file ......................................... 105
- N (Alt-N) Edit note file ............................................ 105
- W Warn days ......................................................... 105
- Alt-J DOS-shell ..................................................... 105
- Alt-X Exit .......................................................... 105
- E Edit entry ........................................................ 106
- System name ........................................................ 106
- Phone number ....................................................... 106
- Device ............................................................. 106
- User profile ....................................................... 106
- Password ........................................................... 106
- Opening hours ...................................................... 107
- Terminal ........................................................... 107
- Dial prefix Dial suffix ........................................... 107
- Comm. information .................................................. 107
- Autologin .......................................................... 107
- Comment 1 Comment 2 ............................................... 108
- Download path ...................................................... 108
- Keyboard mapping ................................................... 108
-
- Translation table .................................................. 108
- Capture file ....................................................... 108
- Note file .......................................................... 108
- Clear last call .................................................... 108
- Time used/Connects ................................................. 108
- Transfer guess ..................................................... 108
- Costs used ......................................................... 109
- Local Echo ......................................................... 109
- StripHigh .......................................................... 109
- Erase backspace .................................................... 109
- Color .............................................................. 109
-
- File tagging and tagmenu ............................................... 110
-
- File tagger keys .................................................... 110
- File tagger cursor movements ........................................ 110
- Tag menu ............................................................ 111
- A Edit tagfile ...................................................... 111
- C Clear all ......................................................... 111
- D Delete (■) ........................................................ 111
- L Load tagfile ...................................................... 111
- S Save tagfile ...................................................... 111
- E Edit entry ........................................................ 112
- I Import dir ........................................................ 112
- F Filelist .......................................................... 112
- Turbo Search ....................................................... 113
- View filelist ...................................................... 113
- Tag from list ...................................................... 113
- Pack filelists ..................................................... 114
- Unpack filelists ................................................... 114
- Filemanager ........................................................ 114
- M Magic ............................................................. 114
- G GenTag ............................................................ 114
- B Sort .............................................................. 114
- U UnTag ............................................................. 114
- Del Remove entry .................................................... 114
- ■=Sent / ■=Request .................................................. 114
- Space / Return ...................................................... 114
- + All+13 - All+32 / +-* Toggle all .................................. 114
-
- The Filemanager ........................................................ 116
-
- Changing directory .................................................. 116
- Drive colours ....................................................... 116
- K Mask .............................................................. 116
- P Enter/create path ................................................. 116
- Movements ........................................................... 118
- Left cursor (< An arrow pointing to the left) ....................... 118
- Right cursor (> An arrow pointing to the right) ..................... 118
- . Reread ............................................................ 118
- \ Change to root .................................................... 118
- + Tag all ........................................................... 118
- - Untag all ......................................................... 118
- * Invert all ........................................................ 118
- SPACE Tag ........................................................... 119
- TAB Change window ................................................... 119
- T Enter CPS ......................................................... 119
- S Sort files ........................................................ 119
- C Copy file(s) (Print textfiles) .................................... 119
- M Move file(s) ...................................................... 119
-
- R Rename file ....................................................... 119
- D (DEL) Delete file(s) .............................................. 119
- A Change attributes ................................................. 119
- J DOS-Shell ......................................................... 120
- U Compare paths ..................................................... 120
- N Send filename ..................................................... 120
- Z Tree-size ......................................................... 120
- V View file ......................................................... 120
- E Edit file ......................................................... 120
- F Find file(s) ...................................................... 120
- W Window display style .............................................. 120
- I Disk information .................................................. 120
- X Edit extensions ................................................... 120
- O DOS-command ....................................................... 121
- B Both paths ........................................................ 121
- Q Quiet ............................................................. 121
- Fido-style address .................................................. 121
-
- The Fax manager ........................................................ 122
-
- Introduction to the faxmanager ...................................... 122
- The fax manager menu ................................................ 122
- Receive faxes ....................................................... 123
- Force receive ....................................................... 123
- Polling fax ......................................................... 123
- Send fax ............................................................ 123
- Quick note ......................................................... 123
- File selector ...................................................... 123
- Pick phone entry ................................................... 123
- Accept fax info .................................................... 124
- Send with cover page / Send without cover page .................... 124
- To ................................................................. 125
- Number ............................................................. 125
- From ............................................................... 125
- Current cover page ................................................. 125
- Multi fax ........................................................... 125
- Start multifax ..................................................... 125
- Phonelist .......................................................... 125
- File to fax ........................................................ 125
- Multi cover page ................................................... 125
- Reset phonelist .................................................... 125
- Cost estimate ...................................................... 126
- Schedule fax ........................................................ 126
- Convert ............................................................. 126
- View faxes .......................................................... 126
- Print files ......................................................... 126
- File manager ........................................................ 126
- Fax phonebook ....................................................... 126
- View logfile ........................................................ 126
- Encryption menu ..................................................... 126
- Password ........................................................... 126
- Auto encrypt ....................................................... 126
- Encrypt any file ................................................... 126
- Decrypt any file ................................................... 127
- Fax configuration ................................................... 127
- Auto config ........................................................ 127
- Fax device ......................................................... 127
- Class .............................................................. 127
- Receive class ...................................................... 127
- Fax bps rate ....................................................... 127
-
- Initstring ......................................................... 128
- Dial prefix ........................................................ 128
- Error correction ................................................... 128
- Local ID ........................................................... 128
- Fine resolution .................................................... 128
- Ring counter ....................................................... 128
- Send retries ....................................................... 128
- Retry delay ........................................................ 128
- Page width ......................................................... 128
- Page header line ................................................... 128
- Pagesize & margins ................................................. 129
- Incoming control ................................................... 129
- Slow init .......................................................... 129
- Filenames & paths .................................................. 129
- Fax path .......................................................... 129
- Fax receive path .................................................. 129
- Fax transmit path ................................................. 129
- Font .............................................................. 130
- HP LaserJet font .................................................. 130
- CAS PCX Logo file ................................................. 130
- Cover page ........................................................ 130
- Fax phonebook ..................................................... 131
- Printer setup ...................................................... 131
- Printer ........................................................... 131
- Printer path ...................................................... 131
- Auto print ........................................................ 131
- Use scaling ....................................................... 131
- Suppress blanks ................................................... 131
- Print header ...................................................... 131
- Fax command line switches ........................................... 131
- Send a fax ......................................................... 131
- /FAX /SEND Filename Number-to-dial [To-user] [From-user] .......... 131
- Receive faxes ...................................................... 132
- /FAX /RECEIVE ..................................................... 132
- Send multifaxes .................................................... 132
- /FAX /MULTI filename file-with-numbers /RESET ..................... 132
- Convert files ...................................................... 132
- /CONVERT filename ................................................. 132
- Print files ........................................................ 132
- /PRINT filename ................................................... 132
-
- CD audio player ........................................................ 134
-
- Play ................................................................ 134
- Stop ................................................................ 134
- Resume .............................................................. 134
- Next ................................................................ 134
- Previous ............................................................ 134
- Eject ............................................................... 134
- Lock CD door ........................................................ 135
- MSCDEX Version ...................................................... 135
- CD in drive ......................................................... 135
- Door locked ......................................................... 135
- Raw and cooked ...................................................... 135
- Data and Audio ...................................................... 135
- HSG and Red book .................................................... 135
- Audiomanipulation ................................................... 135
- Volume size ......................................................... 135
- Track ............................................................... 135
- Track start ......................................................... 135
-
- Total track time .................................................... 135
- Track time .......................................................... 135
- Track time left ..................................................... 135
- Copyrighted track ................................................... 136
-
- International information .............................................. 137
-
- International information ........................................... 137
- Unit of measurement ................................................ 137
- Numeric sizes ...................................................... 137
- Linear measure ..................................................... 138
- Square measure ..................................................... 138
- Cubic measure ...................................................... 139
- Weight ............................................................. 140
- Temperature ........................................................ 140
- Decimal/Hexadecimal/Binary numeric systems ......................... 140
- Hexadecimal (hex) -> Binary ........................................ 141
- Binary -> Hexadecimal (hex) ........................................ 141
- Decimal -> Hexadecimal ............................................. 141
- Hexadecimal -> Decimal ............................................. 142
- Decimal -> Binary .................................................. 142
- Binary -> Decimal .................................................. 143
-
- End of manual .......................................................... 144
-
- Information about SHAREWARE/LITE/PLUS versions ...................... 144
- SHAREWARE versions: ................................................ 144
- LITE versions: ..................................................... 144
- PLUS versions: ..................................................... 144
- PROFESSIONAL versions: ............................................. 144
- EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY .............................................. 145
- Special thanks ...................................................... 145
- Trademarks .......................................................... 146
- The story about the Terminate trademark ............................. 146
-
- Information for blind people ........................................... 147
-
- Additional Features when you Register... ............................... 150
-
- Licence agreement ...................................................... 152
-
-
-
- Introduction to the Final Terminal
-
- Welcome to Terminate's On-Line Manual.
-
- This manual is designed so anyone can add comments or even change the
- language as easily as possible.
-
- Once you have upgraded, you may change the help files (*.HLP) for your
- own purposes, but you are NOT allowed to distribute any modified files
- without permission. If you do translate files into your own language,
- please send a copy to
-
- DAN BBS ApS, Kastanie alle 14, 2620 Albertslund, Denmark
-
- or to a Registration Site so other users can benefit from your work.
-
- What is a terminal program?
-
- A terminal program is used for communicating with other computers via
- special hardware. Terminate takes care of the hardware interface - whether
- it's a data modem, ISDN adapter or fossil - via its' various inbuilt device
- layers and leaves you free to concentrate on the message rather than the
- medium.
- Terminates' various emulations and protocols will interpret colour codes
- and draw your screen appropriately and transfer files from and to your
- system.
- Other terminal programs will cope with this basic job too, but we like to
- think that what makes Terminate different is the helpful human interface
- and added features to help you communicate quicker and easier.
-
- This did not happen by accident. Terminate is better because of the
- suggestions from our hundreds of thousands of users all over the world.
- Please tell us if there is anything we need to change or add to make it
- better for YOU!
-
- Online help
-
- In almost every menu you are able to press F1 to get help for the current
- menu. If you want to change the help file, you can press E to edit the
- file directly. To speed things up, you can press F and enter a keyword to
- find. This function will only search forwards - so if you want to search
- the entire helpfile, you must press HOME first. I have chosen to use this
- form of On-line Help, because then the entire manual can be loaded
- directly from the menus where it is needed. You can run MANUAL.EXE, which
- will compile all the help files into one big manual without colorcodes,
- and then you can print it out. In this way you don't have to waste disk
- space on both help files AND a manual since you can always delete
- TERMINAT.DOC and run the MANUAL.EXE program later.
-
- TERMINAT ? will give you a list of all available parameters
-
- You are now in terminal mode and have configured the system.
- If you have not configured Terminate, press Alt-O now. Remember that you
- can press F1 in any menu where you need more help.
-
- Editing input fields
-
- When you start editing a field/number/string, you can modify the previous
-
- - 2 -
-
- contents by first pressing cursor left/right. The field will then change
- colour and you can append/insert new characters. If you just start typing
- immediately, the field will be blanked and the cursor placed on position 1.
- Terminate will always remember the last 16 fields you have typed. That way,
- if you type something new in a field and want to change it back, just edit
- the field again and press CURSOR-UP or DOWN and you are now able to
- cycle between the last 16 fields. In every input field where all characters
- are allowed, you can also press Alt-A and the character selector will
- appear, showing all characters from #0..#255.
- If you want a return sign, just move to #13 and press return. To see all 16
- strings, press Alt-F9 from terminal mode.
-
- The following section outlines all Terminal mode commands and gives some
- useful tips and tricks. We advise you to read all of this if you are not
- familiar with modems and communication programs.
-
- If you are an advanced user you can probably guess what most functions
- are used for and settle for the quick reference at Alt-Z and the help
- lines at the bottom line in the menus.
-
- Mouse
-
- The mouse system in Terminate provides some nice features and allows you to
- move around easily in menus and even start downloading without touching the
- keyboard.
- You must have already installed a mouse driver, of course, eg: MOUSE.COM
- v9.00 (MicroSoft) or LMOUSE.COM v6.10 (LogiTech) or similar.
- Old mouse drivers may conflict with our communication driver - so if your
- screen messes up, try turning off the mouse. If that does not work, then
- try using another mouse driver. Old mouse drivers is also only able to
- support 80x25,80x43,80x50 and not all the extended modes like
- 100x40, 132x60 etc.
-
- In menus, pressing the left button will be the same as pressing return on
- that line. The right button will simulate the escape key and will leave the
- menu. In terminal mode, left button on an empty line will send a return
- (ASCII 13). Right button on an empty line will send a space (ASCII 32)
- Pressing on any character on the terminal screen, will send that character
- exactly as if you typed it yourself. You do not have to position the cursor
- directly - if you click on a blank place, Terminate will find the nearest
- character on the screen and send that instead of the space.
- The mouse can be turned on/off in the Toggles menu.
-
- Send 'F'
- |
- ScreenLine = ' M Messages F Files '
- | |
- Send 'M' Send 's'
-
- Pressing right button in the statusline will allow you to toggle between
- 3 different statusbars, allowing you to send all possible characters.
- If you hold down one of the buttons, and mark a piece of the line, the
- marked piece area will be sent by the modem; useful if a BBS program wants
- you to type an areaname already shown on the screen!
-
- SHIFT-ESC Runtime information
-
- Pressing Shift-Esc will bring you to the Runtime information menu.
- This menu can be called from all other menus and will give you all
- kinds of information. Like current drive. Last incoming characters.
-
- - 3 -
-
- Costs. Memory left etc. look for yourself.
-
- Alt-A SmartNote
-
- If you use The Internet or some other network where you need to remember
- hundreds of different strings or note down lots of information, then you
- cannot live any longer without the SmartNote!
- The SmartNote function is better than a very long piece of paper because
- it is always ready for writing down anything needed at a later time.
- Backups will be made automatically.
-
- For example, you see something on the screen you wish to note:
-
- 1. Press Alt-K and grab the text with the string grabber - this can
- be adjusted in size and position with Shift and cursor-keys.
- 2. Then enter SmartNote by pressing Alt-A and import by pressing
- Alt-G at the place you want the grabbed text to appear.
-
- NB: It does not matter where you see something on the screen, just so long
- as you are inside Terminate. The Alt-K string grabber will work everywhere.
- If, for example, you want to copy something to another note file, just
- follow the procedure above.
- If you want to test this powerful feature, you could go into Alt-O, press
- Alt-K and grab some of the menu. Then start up SmartNote with Alt-A and
- insert the grabbed text with Alt-G. (You can grab from any of the Manual
- Files and insert in a note file.)
- You can adjust the grabbers' size by holding down Shift and then using the
- cursor movement keys (Arrow up, down, right or left). Z will Zoom the
- grabber to maximum size.
- Once you try this, you will soon understand how powerful and useful this
- feature can be!
-
- The editor inside SmartNote has the following functions:
-
- SmartNote commands
-
- (Many of these commands are the same as Qedit by SEMWARE)
-
- Alt-1 Uppercase line
- Alt-2 Lowercase line
- Alt-A Select character from ASCII-selector
- Alt-C Clear/erase all lines
- Alt-D Do it for you. Simulate a fast typist
- Alt-E Edit file with the external editor
- Alt-F Search after keyword
- Alt-G Import the last block you grabbed with Alt-K
- Alt-I Import all history strings at cursorline
- Alt-J Jump to DOS
- Alt-K String grabber
- Alt-L Load another note file
- Alt-R Send from cursor position and Rest of line
- Alt-S Send line without carriage return (#13)
- Alt-T Send from position 1 To cursor position
- Alt-U Import textfile into cursor position
- Alt-W Send Word under cursor
- Alt-Z Turbo Search in all note files
-
- - 4 -
-
-
- ┌──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────┤ Searching for 'YOU' ├┐
- │ INTERNET │ Here you can place any command you like or just want to r │
- │ INTERNET │ The following lines are only examples of what you could s │
- │ SMARTNOT │ used by default. If you want to use another note file with │
- │ SMARTNOT │ it will be used when you are online at that system. │
- │ SMARTNOT │ In here you can write all the information you normally wr │
- │ SMARTNOT │ several small pieces of papers, which you of course cannot │
- │ SMARTNOT │ You can grab from all places in Terminate, not only in term │
- │ SMARTNOT │ I hope you now understand how useful this feature will be │
- │ SMARTNOT │ Try and grab something, it does not matter where you grab f │
- │ SMARTNOT │ matters that you try yourself and see how easy you can grab │
- │ COMPSERV │ Here you can place any command you like or just want to r │
- │ COMPSERV │ The following lines are only examples of what you could s │
- └──────────┴─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- Turbo Search will allow you to search through all note files very fast
- and let you choose your match and jump to the place in the notefile
- where the match was found. If several matches were found, then you will
- be asked which match to use, like the above example.
-
- Ctrl-Enter Send line to device with a carriage return (#13)
- Ctrl-Y Delete current line
- Ctrl-T Delete right word
- F2 Add line
- F4 Duplicate line
- F6 Delete from cursor until end of line
- Alt-F9 History strings
-
- SmartNote cursor-movement commands
-
- Home Goto start of line
- End Goto end of line
- Ctrl-Home Goto first screen line
- Ctrl-End Goto last screen line
- Cursor Up Move 1 line up
- Cursor Down Move 1 line down
- Cursor Left Move one position left
- Cursor Right Move one position right
- Ctrl-Left Move one word to the left
- Ctrl-Right Move one word to the right
- PageUp Go 1 page down
- PageDown Go 1 page up
- Ctrl-PageUp Goto top of file
- Ctrl-PageDown Goto bottom of file
- Insert Toggle Insert/Overwrite
- Delete Delete character under cursor
- Backspace Delete character before cursor
-
- Alt-B (Shift-CursorUp) Scrollback buffer
-
- Terminate will save the last incoming screen in a
- special buffer. The size of this buffer can be set in the configuration
- and you should decrease it if you are running short of memory. Both text
- and colours are saved in this buffer.
-
- Alt-C Clear Screen
-
- Clears screen, sets default colours and cleans up.
-
-
- - 5 -
-
- Alt-D Dialing directory
-
- The dialling directory. From here you can store all your phone numbers and
- all kinds of other information. The phonebook also holds information on how
- much your phone bill will be for up to one year.
-
- Alt-E Local echo
-
- Echo all characters sent to the modem on the screen. Normally this is
- always turned off.
-
- Alt-F The File Manager
-
- Also calls external utilities and has almost every
- function that Norton Commander(TM) has - and then a little more :-)
-
- Alt-G Scripts
-
- Scripts will follow in later versions...
-
- Alt-H Hangup
-
- Hangs up the 'phone. The hangup string is determined in the Modem &
- Dialling Menu. You can also set a toggle so you will be asked to confirm
- hangup, before actually hanging up.
-
- Alt-I Screen image
-
- Will save the current screen in the capture file (default is
- TERMINAT.CAP). You can define other capture files for each phonebook entry
- and the current capture file will always be used to save images.
-
- Alt-J DOS-Shell
-
- Calls COMMAND.COM (COMSPEC) and invokes a dos-shell. You can set Terminate
- up to not swap out memory first. Type EXIT to return.
-
- Alt-K String grabber
-
- Grabs any string and saves it in the history strings. You can adjust the
- grab size by pressing Shift and move cursor keys right, left, up or down.
- You can use this function EVERYWHERE in Terminate. So if you call a system,
- and want to remember a phone number: Grab the number, go into the
- phonebook, add a new entry, edit phone number, press cursor up and
- recall the grabbed number. This should save you cluttering your desk with
- thousands of small pieces of paper!
-
- Alt-L Capture file
-
- Opens or closes the current capture file; the capture files can be defined
- for each phonebook entry. If you define a capture file and call a system,
- the capture file will be opened upon connection. You can turn the
- auto-capture system off by pressing Alt-0 and toggle if off permanently.
- You can also force Terminate to always overwrite old capture files by
- turning on a toggle. Use PRN or LPTx to capture directly to printer.
-
- - 6 -
-
-
- Alt-M Miscellaneous functions
-
- ╒╡ Miscellaneous functions ╞╕
- │ Modem reset/Init device │
- │ Answer call at once │
- ├───────────────────────────┤
- │ 25 lines │
- │ 30 lines │
- │ 43/50 lines │
- │ V Tseng 4000 100x40 │
- │ O XGA 132x25 │
- │ E Reset 80x25 │
- ├───────────────────────────┤
- │ Hostmode │
- │ Fax Manager (Alt-F12) │
- │ Run Download Manager... │
- │ Keyboard lock │
- │ Blanker (screen) │
- │ Choose char to send │
- │ S-registers (read/write) │
- │ Terminal mode simulation │
- │ List of countries │
- │ GMT & time zones │
- │ Privacy Insurance │
- ╘═══════════════════════════╛
-
- M First reset device, then allows you to select which init
- string to send to the modem
- A Pick up phone (send the auto answer string)
- 2 Switch to 25 lines screen mode
- 3 Switch to 30 lines screen mode (VGA only)
- 4 If EGA, then switch to 43 lines; if VGA, then 50 lines
- V Startup screen mode if using custom screen modes
- O Another definable screen mode
- E Mode to use when exiting Terminate and using custom mode
- H Startup hostmode, look in configuration for more information
- You can also start the hostmode directly: TERMINAT /HOST
- F This menu will allow you to send and recieve faxes, please refer to
- the information later in this manual or press F1 in the menu. Alt-F12
- from terminal mode will also start this menu.
- R Run Download Manager
- K Locks keyboard with password
- B Activate the screen blanker
- C Choose a char from the ASCII selector to send directly to port
- S Show/change S-registers in a HAYES(tm) compatible modem.
- T Simulate characters received from modem or other device.
- With this function you can first capture some screens with Alt-L
- and then replay the screens later in the current emulation to see
- if they display correctly. With this you can test if your ANSI, AVATAR
- etc. screens are working properly.
- L Show list of countries that are directly supported in Terminate.
- G Watch the time all over the world.
- P Privacy Insurance.
-
- - 7 -
-
-
- Greenwich Mean Time
-
- ╒══════════════════════╡ Greenwich Mean Time (G.M.T.) & time zones ╞╕
- │ │
- │ Greenwich Mean Time 23.15.29 │
- │ │
- │ Your country 45 Denmark / Danmark │
- │ │
- │ Time zones │
- │ Lowest GMT+1 00.15.29 │
- │ Highest GMT+1 00.15.29 │
- │ Your zone GMT+1 00.15.29 │
- │ │
- │■Other country 1 United States / Canada │
- │ │
- │ Time zones │
- │ Lowest GMT-11 12.15.29 │
- │ Highest GMT-3 20.15.29 │
- │ Zone used GMT-7 16.15.29 │
- │ │
- ├───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ TAB Move between lines C Country list │
- │ LEFT/RIGHT Change GMT time or time zone │
- │ UP/DOWN Change country │
- ├───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ This function does not handle daylight saving time (summer time) │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- From this menu will you be able of viewing the current time in many
- countries. The GMT must be adjusted if it is not correct. Terminate will
- guess your time zone, but in some countries that have several time zones
- like USA and Russia you must adjust the GMT to the right time. GMT is
- the exact time in a part of London called Greenwich, which lies next to
- the river Thames. Press TAB to move the '■' around and the cursors to
- change time or zone. C will show you the entire list of countries that
- Terminate supports.
-
- Privacy Insurance
-
- With this function, Terminate will pretend that you are home. It will pick
- up the phone randomly after 1 to 5 rings and hang up immediately. Every
- call is noted in the logfile.
-
- Prevent annoying phonecalls
-
- If someone wants to bother you by calling in at odd hours, this
- function will avoid any disturbance. After a while the would-be
- prankster will become bored and quit.
-
- Prevent burglary
-
- By enabling this function you make sure that thieves who are calling you
- to check if you're home can not be sure whether you are home or not.
- They might think that you are home and don't want to talk to anyonne -
- in any case, they will certainly be uncertain and possibly change their
- mind.
-
- WE CAN NOT GUARANTEE OR PROMISE THAT THESE FUNCTIONS GENERATE THE
- DESIRED RESULTS. USE AT OWN RISK.
-
- - 8 -
-
-
- Alt-N Send username
-
- Sends the user name from the current user profile. You will normally use
- this function where Terminate can not log on automatically.
-
- Alt-O Configuration
-
- All the configuration menus.
-
- Alt-P Adjust comm. parameters
-
- Quick change of device, comport, baudrate, databits, parity, stopbit. You
- can also save the chosen setup directly as the default startup settings.
-
- Alt-Q Quit autologin
-
- Quits current autologin script. If you see a flashing A in the
- statusline then probably Terminate did not logon properly. Try correcting
- the login scripts in the configuration menus or turn them off.
-
- Alt-R Select download path
-
- Terminate has 3 download paths available. At startup, number 1 will always
- be the default - but you can change this manually or
- change it for each phone entry.
-
- Alt-S Send password
-
- If you have called a system, then the password from the phonebook is sent.
- If that password entry is blank you will be asked to either input a new
- password directly or send the default password from the current
- userprofile.
-
- Alt-T Terminal emulation
-
- Change the current terminal emulation. The first one - called 'Avatar/0*
- with ANSI-BBS fallback' - can be used on most systems to allow you to run
- both Avatar and ANSI at the same time. Terminal emulations determine how
- the control codes and colours are processed and displayed on your screen.
-
- Alt-U System information
-
- Which multitasker, processor, graphics card, speed index etc...
-
- Alt-V VISIBLE FAST (tm) access menu
-
- This menu allows fast access with the mouse to all functions from just
- one screen. For access, you can also just click a mouse button in the
- lower right corner.
-
- - 9 -
-
-
- Alt-W Translation editor
-
- Handles how characters are changed before they are sent
- to the remote system or what to change before displaying the character on
- the screen. This function is mostly used when calling Hosts or systems that
- cannot handle 8-bit characters.
-
- ╒═══════════════════════════════════════════╡ Translation editor ╞╕
- │ Filename : .XLT │
- │ Comment : Default translation tables for terminate │
- │ ( 0) ( Incoming table ) │
- │ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . │
- │ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . │
- │ ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / │
- │ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? │
- │ @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O │
- │ P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ │
- │ ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o │
- │ p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ │
- │ Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Å │
- │ É æ Æ ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ¢ £ ¥ ₧ ƒ │
- │ á í ó ú ñ Ñ ª º ¿ ⌐ ¬ ½ ¼ ¡ « » │
- │ ░ ▒ ▓ │ ┤ ╡ ╢ ╖ ╕ ╣ ║ ╗ ╝ ╜ ╛ ┐ │
- │ └ ┴ ┬ ├ ─ ┼ ╞ ╟ ╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ ╠ ═ ╬ ╧ │
- │ ╨ ╤ ╥ ╙ ╘ ╒ ╓ ╫ ╪ ┘ ┌ █ ▄ ▌ ▐ ▀ │
- │ α ß Γ π Σ σ µ τ Φ Θ Ω δ ∞ φ ε ∩ │
- │ ≡ ± ≥ ≤ ⌠ ⌡ ÷ ≈ ° ∙ · √ ⁿ ² ■ │
- │ │
- │ R Reset L Load S Save T Incoming/outgoing U ASCII/Value │
- │ X Translate a file using this table │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Comment
-
- Since it is important to know what the table is used for it is
- strongly advised that you enter the description here.
-
- R Reset
-
- Remove all changes and clean the board.
-
- L Load
-
- Load a table
-
- S Save
-
- Save table
-
- T Incoming/outgoing
-
- A table consists of an incoming and an outgoing table. The incoming
- is when you receive something from the other end, then this table
- will be used. The outgoing is when you send something.
-
- U ASCII/Value
-
- Toggle values instead of character apperance.
-
-
- - 10 -
-
- X Translate a file using this table
-
- Translate a complete file using the current table. This can be used
- if you have files from other non PC's (Amiga, MAC, etc)
-
- Alt-Y Chat mode
-
- If you are connected to another Terminate and press Alt-Y, Terminate
- will send '**EMSI_CHTF5D4'+#13 to the other end. This is normally
- used by IEMSI sessions, but a Terminate at the other end will change
- automatically - even when NOT in IEMSI mode. When you press Alt-Y again to
- exit chatmode the string '**EMSI_TCH3C60'+#13 will be sent to the other end
- so both ends exit chat mode.
- Chatmode works just like a terminal emulation so you can use all other
- functions while you are chatting, including starting to up/download.
-
- Alt-X Exit Terminate
-
- A function you hopefully only will use once a day :-)
- If you are online (Carrier detected) you will be asked what to do: Exit,
- Hangup & exit, or Not exit. You can also turn on a toggle that will ask you
- if you are sure you want to exit Terminate.
-
- Alt-Z Quick reference menu
-
- Here you can see a short description of all
- functions - and see which functions are On or Off.
-
- Alt-= Load a keyboard table
-
- This key is different on some international
- keyboards. It is the key next to the BACKSPACE. Hold down Alt and press
- the = (the key to the left of the backspace).
- Keyboards can be customized in the configuration. You can setup a default
- keyboard for each terminal emulation, but you can also specify a keyboard
- file to be loaded for each phonebook entry.
-
- Ctrl-End Break
-
- Will send a break to the other end. Breaks are rarely used anymore, but
- Terminate will both detect and send breaks. A break is a condition in
- which the data line is filled with zero bits for as long as it takes to
- send one character. Some switchboards will need a break to hangup the line.
- It can also be used to reset the buffers in your modem, if the modem has
- been setup to act this way. If you are not an advanced user you will never
- use this.
-
- ScrollLock Doorway mode
-
- This is a special mode (originated by Marshall Dudley) to
- allow you to send keyboard scan codes, instead of normal ASCII characters.
- The statusline will be removed so the entire screen can be used. If you
- need to use a menu, you must first disable Doorway mode, use the menu and
- then enable Doorway mode again. The reason is that when you press, for
- example, Alt-O then the scancode for Alt-O is sent and the remote site can
- use the Alt-O as if that key had been pressed at the remote site.
- The technical idea behind this Doorway mode is quite simple: If normal
- ASCII character, then send character; else, if special key, send a ASCII 0,
- send scancode.
-
-
- - 11 -
-
- PageDown Download
-
- Here you can select which protocol you want to use for the file
- transfer. Download means receive files. A file transfer protocol is a way
- of sending/receiving data between the remote site and ourselves. Zmodem is
- the best to use for normal users where it is available...
-
- PageUp Upload
-
- When you want to send a file to the remote site, you will have to
- use a file transfer protocol. First you will be placed in the filemanager.
- From here you can select a file or files (if the file-protocol allows batch
- transfers, meaning more than 1 file at the time). Just press RETURN on
- the selected file then the transfer will start. If you are using a batch
- protocol, lets say Zmodem, then you can select several files by marking
- the files first. You can select files in both windows.
-
- Alt-1..Alt-0 Change different toggles
-
- These are toggles that can be set permanently in the configuration.
-
- Alt-1 Sound
-
- Turns beeps/alarms/alerts on/off
-
- Alt-2 ANSI music
-
- Turns ANSI music on/off. If any remote sites have ANSI music it may be
- played. Terminate supports full ANSI music. Pressing Alt-2 while music is
- playing will reset the music buffer.
-
- Alt-3 Statusline
-
- Turn the statusline on/off. You can select in Emulation Setup not to have
- the statusline, but since the statusline gives you important information
- you should not need to turn it off.
-
- Alt-4 Usagelog
-
- The usage log is normally always turned on at startup, so you can later
- see where you have called and which files you have downloaded. But you can
- turn it off here, if there is a reason for not having something logged.
-
- Alt-5 Add linefeed
-
- You can add a linefeed (#10) when Terminate receives a carriage return
- (#13). This is normally not used and should be turned off as the default.
-
- Alt-6 IEMSI
-
- Turn on/off IEMSI logins. IEMSI logins will allow you to fast login to
- systems that support IEMSI (RemoteAccess, SuperBBS, Maximus, EzyCom). You
- can setup options to rescan files, clear screen, etc, before calling the
- system. Look in the Users/IEMSI setup for more information.
-
- Alt-7 Ctrl-Status
-
- Toggle if you want the statusline to show information about CTRL-keys. This
- can be turned off if you think it annoying that it changes all the time
- (eg. if you use the CTRL key a lot in terminal mode.) You can also turn
-
- - 12 -
-
- this off in the configuration.
-
- Alt-8 Alt-Status
-
- Turn on/off information in statusline about the Alt-F1..Alt-F10 keys -
- although there is normally no reason for turning this off.
-
- Alt-9 Ctrl-Shift-Status
-
- Turns on/off information about the keys Ctrl-Shift-F1..F10. This will show
- you the abbreviated status of your external utilities. There is no reason
- to turn this off.
-
- Alt-0 Auto capture
-
- Auto capture on/off. If you have defined a capture file for the phonebook
- entry you have dialled, the capture file will be opened automatically at
- connect. If you don't want to capture anything you can turn this off.
-
- Alt-F1 Status left
-
- Will toggle the information in the statusline to the left. The startup
- setting and how to change on connect can be setup in configuration. It has
- 4 states:
-
- Alt-Z for help just Help Information.
-
- dsrdtr cd sdrd ctsrtsri Modem lights: capital letters mean
- that the line is high. If cd is in
- big letters:'CD', then carrier detect
- on the modem is high (red/on).
-
- System Name Name of the system called or `Manual' if
- connection was not made via the dialer.
-
- Current device Which device is in use.
-
- Alt-F2 Status right
-
- Will toggle the information in the statusline to the right.
- The startup setting and how to change on connect can be setup in
- configuration. It has 6 states:
-
- Time Current local time
-
- Online time Online time in mm:ss format
-
- Costs How much money you have used this call
-
- Online time Online time in hh:mm format
-
- Secondary currency Show costs in secondary currency
-
- Cursor position Show x,y position of cursor on screen
-
- Alt-F3 Pause function
-
- Pause. Many systems will log you off if you don't do anything for 2-3
- minutes. This function will allow you to send a predefined character every
- x seconds, to make the system at the other end think you are active. The
-
- - 13 -
-
- default is to send a RETURN (ASCII 13) every 30 seconds. This is useful if
- the doorbell rings and you have just connected to a very busy system, which
- would take hours to get back onto, if you didn't have Terminate.
-
- Alt-F4 IEMSI information
-
- Will show you the same information as you see just right after an IEMSI
- connection. It will tell you exactly which BBS system and version number
- the remote is running. Also the system name, sysop name, location and what
- the local time is at the remote location.
-
- Alt-F5 File tagger
-
- This function will identify possible filenames anywhere on the
- screen. You can tag the files you want to download so you don't need to
- write them down on paper. You can also use the scrollback buffer Alt-B
- and tag files from there.
-
- Alt-F6 Tagmenu
-
- When you have tagged some files, and selected a protocol at the
- remote site, then you will normally be asked which files to download.
- The tagmenu will have stored all the files you want and will then send the
- filenames, so you will not have to do this manually. The tagmenu has many,
- many more functions such as tagging from file lists.
-
- Alt-F7 Point system
-
- The point system is a system were you can send/get mail or
- files. It can connect to any other program using a mailer that has EMSI.
- At the present time: Frontdoor, d'Bridge, Binkley, Portal of Power etc.
- Note that you will not actually get online to the system, but only connect
- to the remote mail system. From here you can request files from
- that system, without even getting online. You can also write a netmail
- message directly to sysops. But please, refer to the point manual for
- more.
-
- Alt-F8 Hostmode
-
- For more information about the hostmode, see the section about hostmode
- or enter hostmode and press F1.
-
- Alt-F9 History strings
-
- Here you can edit or send old strings to the modem. Every time you edit
- a string anywhere in Terminate, the last string will be saved and you can
- recall old strings in an input field, by pressing Cursor Up/Down.
- RETURN will edit the strings, and SPACE will send the string to the modem.
- Here also the description for files is saved when uploading and a FILES.BBS
- /DESCRIPT.ION file exists. You can also save and load the last 16 history
- strings. If you have a FILES.BBS/DESCRIPT.ION file in the same directory as
- the files, Terminate can find the description and import from the line
- where the description for the file is found and the subsequent 16 lines
- (Only FILES.BBS and in case of several description lines). When pressing
- 'I', the filemanager will be called, just find the file and press
- 'RETURN' with the cursor positioned above the filename.
-
- Alt-F10 CD Audio player
-
- If you have an audio CD-ROM, and have installed MSCDEX
-
- - 14 -
-
- (Microsoft CD Extension). Then you will be able to play normal music CD's.
- You can view the start and length of every track on the CD.
-
- Alt-F11 External editor
-
- Calls the external editor. This could be Q.EXE (Qedit) or whatever editor
- you might like to use.
-
-
- Alt-F12 Fax manager.
-
- See the documentation for the fax manager.
-
- NETWORK
-
- To use Terminate on a network drive you must set the file to be shareable.
- With Novell you can use the FLAG command. FLAG TERMINAT.EXE srw, then
- the file will be set to shareable.
- On networks that do not support sharing directly (eg Lantastic), you
- must load SHARE.EXE on the server ONLY. A lot of people think they must
- load SHARE.EXE on the work stations also. But this is a mistake!!!!
- SHARE.EXE should only be loaded on machines that allow others to access the
- hard disk. So if you have a workstation that only accesses the server, you
- should NEVER waste memory on loading SHARE.EXE. Unfortunately a lot of
- programmers have misunderstood this idea and demand that SHARE is present.
-
- The only problems that occur when running Terminate from several stations
- at one time is that you cannot write to the same logfile and use the same
- swapfile. This can be helped by either turning the logfile off or setting
- an environment variable in your AUTOEXEC.BAT like this:
-
- SET NET=1
-
- Then define TERMINA%NET%.LOG. When opening the logfile TERMINA1.LOG
- will be used. If SET NET=2 then TERMINA2.LOG etc. will be used.
- Note that Terminate will always replace environment variables with the
- correct values. The same goes for the swapfile.
-
- You can also use different configuration files using this system.
-
- TERMINAT /C:TERMINA%NET%.CFG
-
- Then TERMINA1.CFG will be used for this station, if SET NET=2 then
- TERMINA2.CFG will be used. If you are a network administrator then I bet
- you have had these problems with configuration files many times before,
- but this should solve any problems that you might get.
-
- Terminate Thesaurus
-
- The word Terminate does in our case mean to come to an end of a dataline,
- but in other cases the word can have different meanings:
-
- abort, bring or come to an end, cease, close, complete, conclude, cut off,
- discontinue, end, expire, finish, issue, lapse, put an end to, result,
- run out, stop, wind up.
-
-
- - 15 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Configurating Terminate ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- -=> T E R M I N A T E C O N F I G U R A T I O N <=-
-
- Setting up Terminate is the easiest thing in the world. All options and
- features are already set to give best performance - all you should do is to
- adjust the few things you would like to function in ways other than
- standard. Remember: If you do not understand something - then leave it alone
- and do not change it!
-
- If you make some kind of mistake and your machine hangs, because of a wrong
- device or something like that, you can start Terminate with the /CONFIG
- parameter. This will only access the configuration and then exit Terminate
- again, without initializing the comport or anything.
-
- Read below for all commandline switches.
-
- ╒══╡ Change configuration ╞╕
- │ Screen and colors │
- │ Communications setup │
- │ General options │
- │ Toggles │
- │ Modem and dialing │
- │ Filenames and paths │
- │ Protocol options │
- │ Emulation/keyboard setup │
- │ Host settings │
- │ Login strings/scripts │
- │ Users/IEMSI/Security │
- │ Point system │
- │ Cost management │
- │ Registration info │
- │ Write setup to disk │
- ╘══════════════════════════╛
-
-
- Screen and colors
-
- Here you can setup all screen related options.
- Colours, windows, videomode, codepage, etc.
-
- Communications setup
-
- One of the most important menus. Setting up your serial connection is
- actually the first thing you always should set up in a terminal program,
- so that communication is fully functional and no errors occur.
-
- General options
-
- Set up Terminate exactly as you like it and define external programs that
- can be called by pressing Ctrl+Shift F-keys.
-
- Toggles
-
- Toggles that can be turned on or off
-
- - 16 -
-
-
- Modem and dialing
-
- After setting up the device you should now configure your modem to give
- best performance. Many popular modems already appear in the picklist which
- is continually being expanded.
-
- Filenames and paths
-
- Define Download/Upload directory, external editor / lister, etc.
- Default files to load when starting Terminate.
-
- Protocol options
-
- Setting up internal and external protocols. Protocols are used for
- transfering files between your system and other systems. Most used is
- Zmodem. As well as being extremely efficient and starting a download
- automatically, it can also recover a file not fully transfered. If the
- connection was lost it can `pick up' again where transmission ceased and
- continue where it left off without having to send the whole file again.
-
- Emulation setup
-
- How Terminate should react to incoming characters. ANSI is one of the most
- used emulations in the world, because it is simple. If you have chosen ANSI
- and Terminate gets a sequence ESC2J (ESC=#27) then the screen will be
- cleared. Terminate will default to using AVATAR with ANSI fallback - that
- means it will understand both AVATAR and ANSI control codes at the same
- time and this should be the preferred setting.
-
- Host settings
-
- Host mode means that you set up Terminate to handle incoming calls and
- allow specific users to logon to your computer.
-
- Login strings/scripts
-
- Instead of having complicated scripts that have to be compiled, Terminate
- has a lot of built-in mini-scripts, which should log you on to almost every
- normal BBS system. Subsequent versions will additionally have a
- comprehensive and sophisticated script language (currently in beta test).
- You can define in Strings all possible questions you want Terminate to
- recognise like 'WHAT IS YOUR NAME','PASSWORD', etc.
-
- Users/IEMSI/Security
-
- Define 10 different users. Each can be used for dialling a system, settings
- for a user that calls the host mode or when you use the point system.
-
- Point system
-
- All settings for the fido point system allowing you to send/receive mail
- and files.
-
- Cost management
-
- Allows you to calculate very exactly how much you spend, when calling
- other systems.
-
- Registration info
-
- - 17 -
-
-
- If this is the PROFESSIONAL version, check that your personal details are
- correctly embedded.
- This menu option will also show you how you can quickly upgrade your
- software to PROFESSIONAL standard...
-
- Write setup to disk
-
- If Autosave config is ON in toggles, then the configuration will be written
- when you leave the configuration menu, so you will not lose your settings
- even if your machine hangs somewhere in an external program.
-
- Command line switches
-
- /CONFIG
-
- Only configures the .CFG file then exits again without initializing
- anything at all.
-
- /F
-
- Only starts up the filemanager, then exits again.
-
- /HOST
-
- Start Terminate normally, then enter hostmode. This could be used in an
- AUTOEXEC.BAT if you want to start in hostmode when accidentally rebooted
- by some external program called while in hostmode.
- If you call Terminate from a mailer, like Portal of Power, you should also
- use the /LOGIN switch, which will login a user, then exit hostmode
- and Terminate. Commandline for mailer: TERMINAT /HOST /LOGIN
-
- /POINT
-
- Startup directly in point system, then exit to DOS when ESC is pressed.
-
- /C:filename.ext
-
- Use alternate configuration file. You can also use environment
- variables in the filename, these will be replaced when opening the file.
- (Network:/C:TERMINA%NET%.CFG)
-
- /NOCARD
-
- Do not test or use any soundcards. (Maybe your machine would hang if this
- was not turned off if you have no card. But this could also be turned off
- when running windows, otherwise windows would say something like `device
- already in use.)
-
- /SKIP
-
- Skip systeminfo tests, PS/2 test. Again this takes microseconds to check,
- and should only be turned off if you have problems with your machine
- hanging when starting Terminate.
-
- /DISK
-
- Force the overlay file to stay on disk. If you have a fast harddisk, you
- don't need to load the overlays into memory, but it will, of course,
- improve the speed of the menus.
-
- - 18 -
-
-
- /BUF:xxx
-
- If you do not load the overlays into memory, then you could increase the
- overlay buffer, but this will grab normal low memory. The xxx value is how
- many kilobytes to add to the previous buffer. The buffer can never be
- lower than the smallest overlay file.
-
- /NOXMS
-
- Terminate will always try XMS first because it is faster than EMS.
- But if you, for some reason, never want Terminate to try XMS or want to
- force Terminate into using EMS memory, you can use this switch.
-
- /DIAL:xxx
-
- After startup, dial this number from phonebook and connect.
-
- /BOSS[:x]
-
- Call Boss and send/receive mail/files. The x is which Boss to call, if
- /BOSS or /BOSS:0, then Terminate will dial all Boss's that have the
- autodial enabled.
-
- /CALL:node/name
-
- Search nodelist for nodenumber or search string and call the first match
- found.
-
- /FIX
-
- Search/Update BIOS data area for serial ports. Will save the normal values
- for the COM-ports into low memory and the bios equipment flag so it would
- look like you have 4 COM-ports. Terminate does not need this but some
- external utilties might.
-
- /SCRLEN:xxx /SCRCOL:xxx
-
- If you are using the custom videomode or a videomode that Terminate cannot
- detect, you will have problems with the screen size. So these parameters
- allow you to force a screen size. Please do not set the size bigger than
- the screen, because it could give unpredictable results.
-
- /DEVICE:x
-
- Force a Terminate device at startup
-
- /PORT:x
-
- Force a COM-port at startup
-
- /BAUD:x
-
- Force a baudrate at startup
-
- /TASK:x
-
- If Terminate cannot detect the multitasker for some reason, you can
- force Terminate to think it is using a multitasker, which means it
- will release timeslices calling the routine for that multitasker.
-
- - 19 -
-
-
- 1 = OS/2
- 2 = Windows
- 3 = DESQview
- 4 = TaskView
- 5 = TopView
- 6 = DoubleDos
- 7 = Virtual
-
- /MODE:x
-
- Force videomode 0=Mono,1=CGA,2=EGA,3=MCGA,4=VGA
- If you use the /MODE Terminate will not try to detect the videoadapter,
- but assume you are right.
-
- /UPG
-
- Will generate an UPGRADE.CFG with all default values. This file is used
- when upgrading from old versions, but you can also use it for testing
- and start Terminate with TERMINAT /C:UPGRADE.CFG
-
- /NOIMPORT
-
- Do not auto-import any configuration from other program.
- Look in INSTALL.DOC for information on importing
-
- Errorlevels
-
- Fatal errors 255
-
- Out of memory, runtime errors, fatal read error from disk.
-
- Overlay errors 254
-
- If a problem occur when loading or using overlays.
-
- Password error 253
-
- If the startup password was not correct.
-
- Lock error 252
-
- If the program was started up from a different path than allowed
-
- Out of diskspace 251
-
- If less than the specified minimum diskspace available.
-
- Inactivity 250
-
- If Terminate was inactive for longer than specified.
-
- Semaphore exit 249
-
- The semaphore file was created or changed filetime, which forces
- Terminate to exit.
-
- Hostmode shutdown 248
-
- If pressing Alt-X or using the /LOGIN /EXIT command
-
- - 20 -
-
-
- No errors 0
-
- Normal exit and closedown, no errors were detected
-
-
- - 21 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Screen and Colors ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ╒════════════════════╤═══════════════════════════════╡ Screen and colors ╞╕
- │ Colors │ │
- │ Auto palette │ Color 0 Mono 0 │
- │ Windows sound │ Off │
- │ Exploding windows │ Off │
- │ Direct writes │ Yes │
- │ Snow checking │ Off │
- │ Screen blanker │ 300 │
- │ Show snakes │ On │
- │ VGA Fadeout │ Off │
- │ Center screen │ On │
- │ Screen size │ Auto Ax Bx Cx Dx │
- │ ├─Start mode │ Tseng 4000 100x40 Registers: 002A │
- │ ├─Other mode │ XGA 132x25 Registers: 0014 │
- │ └─Exit mode │ Reset 80x25 Registers: 0003 │
- │ Big phonebook │ Off │
- │ Force CP-850 │ Off │
- │ Find textmodes │ │
- │ Use intensity │ Off │
- │ Only low ASCII │ Off │
- │ Use SND files │ Off │
- ╘════════════════════╧════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Colors
-
- Define all colours used inside Terminate's menus.
-
- Palette
-
- ╒═════╡ Choose color palette ╞╕
- │ Color 1 │
- │ Color 2 │
- │ Color 3 │
- │ Color 4 │
- │ Color 5 │
- │ Color 6 │
- │ LCD/composite/black & white │
- │ Monochrome │
- │ Flashy │
- │ Purple │
- │ Intense 1 │
- │ Intense 2 │
- │ Intense 3 │
- │ Blind palette │
- ╘═════════════════════════════╛
-
- There are 14 predefined colour palettes - choose the one you like the
- most!. A colour palette is a complete set of colours that will be loaded
- into the default colour record, then you can change some of the colours
- again. If you are blind you should use the last palette, press END and
- return in this menu.
- The Intense requires that you have a graphic adapter that can show
- background color intense instead of blink/flash. (EGA,VGA etc.)
-
- - 22 -
-
-
- Auto palette
-
- At startup, test if colour or monochrome screen. You could enter a '1' at
- Color and a '8' at Mono, then if you start Terminate from a machine with a
- colour graphics card, then palette 1 will be choosen and if it has
- Hercules monochrome then palette 8 will be used. This is useful if you are
- on a network and want to use the same configuration.
-
- Windows sound
-
- Make annoying sounds when popping in or out of windows.
-
- Exploding windows
-
- Try it! (Visual effect)
-
- Direct writes
-
- Should always be turned ON (except in special cases) because using BIOS
- calls is MUCH slower than direct screen writes. Some blind people can
- benefit of using the 'Only menus' function. Which will use direct screen
- writes all other places than in terminal mode. It depends on which
- speech thing you use.
-
- Snow checking
-
- When writing directly to the screen, then remove snow. Should only be
- turned on with old CGA cards, because it can slow down screen writes.
-
- Screen blanker
-
- Blank screen after X seconds if nothing has happened. If you enter '0'
- here, then the screen would never blank out.
-
- Show snakes
-
- When blanking screen, you could allow a lot of snakes to eat your screen.
- The number of snakes will be decided according to how big your screen is
- and how fast your machine is. If using a multitasker you should turn this
- off, since then all timeslices will be released.
-
- VGA Fadeout
-
- Fade down colours on VGA and MCGA cards when leaving Terminate. Looks real
- nice, but not all VGA cards will support this.
-
- Center screen
-
- If you are using a screen size more than 80, lets say 132, and call a
- system that only uses 80 chars (most systems), then Terminate can center
- the screen for you. That means position 1 on the screen will be
- recalculated for all screen writes with (132-80)/2 = 26 as left margin.
-
- Screen size
- ├─Start mode
- ├─Other mode
- └─Exit mode
-
- Screensize has 4 values, Auto, 25, 43/50 and Custom. Auto will just use
-
- - 23 -
-
- whatever videomode is current. 25 will force 25 lines when starting and
- exiting Terminate. 43/50 will force 43/50 lines if you have a EGA or VGA
- card installed when starting or exiting Terminate. Custom will call the
- BIOS videomode routine with the parameters you give. In CUSTOM.DOC you
- will find the codes for several VGA cards. Start mode will then be used at
- startup or when returning from shell. Exit mode will be used when exiting
- Terminate or calling an external utility. If you do not want Terminate to
- change videomode, but always use some other kind of videomode (also when
- calling external utilities), just set the videomode before calling
- Terminate and set Screen size to Auto.
-
- Big phonebook
-
- If ON, when entering the phonebook, Terminate will switch into 43/50 lines
- and back into 25 lines when exiting the phonebook.
- This should not be used together with custom screen size.
-
- Force CP-850
-
- Use framechars only from Codepage 850. Only use this if your windows look
- funny and have strange characters in the frames.
-
- Find textmodes
-
- Run an external program called SCANMODE (in UTILS\), which detects all
- textmodes your VGA card is able of showing. This information is saved
- in MODEINFO.DAT and can afterwards be imported by Terminate.
- You can also run this program manually directly from DOS.
-
- Use intensity
-
- EGA and VGA cards have the possibility of using background intense colors,
- instead of blink/flash. This feature will be turned on/off automatically
- when you select a color palette.
-
- Only low ASCII
-
- Some countries use special codepages where the use of high-ASCII
- causes improper display of the graphical boxes. If you live in such a
- country, turn this toggle on, but beware that Terminate will not look
- like it former self after this.
- This toggle activates the next time you enter the configuration menu.
-
- Use SND files
-
- If you want different sounds inside Terminate, you can define your own.
- All the sound files must be placed in the utility directory.
- Look in UTILS\CONNECT.SND for information on making a sound file.
-
-
- - 24 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Communications ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ╒══════════════════════╤═══════════════════════════╡ Communications setup ╞╕
- │ Device name │ Device Port Baud Com Address Irq Vector │
- ├──────────────────────┼───────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ Async Modem COM1 │ 8250A/16450 1 19200 8N1 $03F8 04 0C │
- │■Async Modem COM2 │ 16550A FIFO 2 19200 8N1 $02F8 03 0B │
- │ Async Modem COM3 │ No UART 3 19200 8N1 $03E8 04 0C │
- │ Async Modem COM4 │ No UART 4 19200 8N1 $02E8 03 0B │
- │ Interrupt 14h │ Interrupt 14h 1 9600 8N1 │
- │ ISDN │ Fossil 1 64000 8N1 │
- │ Fossil │ Fossil 1 38400 8N1 │
- │ │ │
- │ │ │
- │ │ │
- ├──────────────────────┼───────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ Configure comports │ Async Professional │
- │ Check IRQ │ ■ = Default device │
- │ Set default values │ │
- │ Auto installation │ │
- ╘══════════════════════╧═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Maximum baud rates
-
- Since setting up the serial port is one of the most important things in any
- terminal program, you must remember the following rules:
-
- Maximum bps rates:
-
- 4.77 MHz PC (8088) 9600 bps
- 8 MHz PC (8088) 19200 bps
- 8 MHz PC (286) 57600 bps
- 16 MHz PC (386) 115200 bps
-
- When to use a fast 16550A serialchip with FIFO buffer
-
- You need 16550A serial UART chips if you want to have error free connections
- when using: an 8 MHz PC (8088); any kind of multitasker - eg: OS/2, Windows,
- DESQview, etc; a modem connected to a network drive. It does not matter how
- fast your machine is, my 486DX2-66 still gives me errors when there is no
- FIFO buffer in the machine. And this happends with baud rates even at
- 38400. If you have problems, set the speed to 19200 and see if that works.
- The 16550A UART chip gives you a small 16 byte FIFO buffer - which means the
- chip does not have to generate an interrupt every time a character arrives.
- Most PC's are delivered with the old 8250 or 16450 chips (almost the same),
- so if you get CRC errors, you should buy such a card. (Ask us or one of our
- Registration Sites where to obtain them.) All good internal high speed
- modems already have a 16550A UART implemented. When buying an internal modem
- make sure it has one!
-
- - 25 -
-
-
- Device setup
-
- ╒════════════════════════════════════╤═════════════════════╡ Device setup ╞╕
- │ Serial interface │ UART/Serial │
- │ Comport │ 1 │
- │ Device name │ Async Modem COM1 │
- │ Baudrate │ 19200 │
- │ Lock port │ Yes │
- │ Databits / Stopbits / Parity │ 8,1,N │
- │ Phonebook │ TERMINAT.FON │
- │ Costfile │ TERMINAT.CST │
- │ Receive buffer size │ 2048 │
- │ Transmit buffer size │ 4096 │
- │ Software flow control (Xon/Xoff) │ Off │
- │ Hardware flow control (CTS/RTS) │ On │
- │ Hardware flow control (DSR/DTR) │ Off │
- │ Use 16550 fifo if available │ 14 │
- │ Keep 16550 fifo on in shell │ No │
- │ RTS low while writing │ No │
- │ Auto RTS low trigger │ 2 │
- │ Carrier detect mask │ 128 │
- │ Init string │ ATZ^M │
- │ Restore port on close │ No │
- │ Close port in shell │ No │
- ╘════════════════════════════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Serial interface
-
- Terminate supports 4 different interfaces.
-
- UART/Serial Direct serial chips
- Interrupt 14h Via BIOS int 14h max 9600 baud
- Fossil Resident serial devices, like X00/BNU
- or ISDN fossil devices.
- Digiboard Very fast intelligent multiport adapter.
-
- Comport
-
- Select which port to assign for this device, COM1..COM8 can be selected.
-
- Device name
-
- Enter the string to be shown everywhere the device is shown. You should
- enter your modem name here, 'Spirit II 19200 8N1' or whatever you have.
-
- Baudrate
-
- Which baudrate to use for this device as default.
- Note that if you want to use a special baudrate that is not shown in the
- list, just press D and define it.
-
- Lock port
-
- When using a high speed modem (bps>=9600) you should always choose to lock
- the port.
-
- Databits / Stopbits / Parity
-
- Databits
-
- - 26 -
-
-
- A data byte can contain 5,6,7 or 8 bits. The vast majority of applications
- will use either 7 or 8 bits since most of the data we are used to dealing
- with is expressed in 8-bit bytes (although text data can often be expressed
- in only 7-bits).
- Many time-sharing systems, such as CompuServe, work with only 7 data bits
- because that's all they need to display text data. When transfering binary
- data though, for example with a file transfer protocol, you usually switch
- to 8 data bits.
- If you use 8N1 and 7E1 on different systems, you must define 2 different
- devices and select the correct device in the phonebook.
- Create 2 devices which looks the same. They could be called:
- Device 1:MODEM COM2 2400 8N1 Device 2:MODEM COM2 2400 7E1
-
- Stopbits
-
- Stop bits follow the data bits in the serial stream. The value for stop
- bits will always be either 1 or 2. Generally, 1 stop bit is used.
-
- Parity
-
- Parity describes a bit checking scheme. When used, all of the bits in a
- data byte are added together. A final bit, called the parity bit, is added
- such that the sum of all bits will be either odd or even (whichever you
- specify). The transmitter calculates and transmits a parity bit. If it is
- correct then it is assumed that the characters were received without error.
- If not, then it is assumed that there was some sort of error during
- transmission. Possible choices are determined by the remote system:
-
- None No parity is added, default
- Even A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always even
- Odd A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always odd
- Mark A parity bit of value one is always added
- Space A parity bit of value zero is always added
-
- Phonebook
-
- When this device is selected, then use this phonebook. This will only work
- when starting up Terminate.
-
- Costfile
-
- Which costfile to use when using this device.
-
- Receive buffer size Transmit buffer size
-
- Size of internal buffers used by Terminate. Only used with an interface
- that is buffered, otherwise these buffers are ignored. Only the UART/Serial
- interface is buffered. Do NOT change these values unless you are absolutely
- sure that you know what you are doing!
-
- Software flow control (Xon/Xoff)
-
- This option controls the automatic software flow control.
- (Receive flow control - where Terminate tells the remote to stop
- transmitting characters, and Transmit flow control - where Terminate
- responds to the remote's request to stop transmitting characters as its
- input buffer fills. Whenever the input buffer is more than 75% full, an
- Xoff (#19) character is sent to the remote. It is up to the remote to
- recognize the Xoff (#19) and cease sending data. When the input buffer
-
- - 27 -
-
- empties again to below 75% of buffer size, Terminate will send an Xon (#17)
- character to the remote. It is then up to the remote to recognize this
- character and resume sending data.)
-
- Hardware flow control (CTS/RTS)
-
- Hardware flow control is always preferred when available, because it is
- faster and much safer. Hardware flow control works with lowering and
- raising the modem lines. First you need to setup your modem to work with
- CTS/RTS hardware flow control. CTS means Clear-To-Send and when using
- hardware flow control the CTS line must be high (with the CTS light in
- modem lit) before anything will be sent to the modem. When the receive
- buffer is more than 90% full the RTS (Request-To-Send) line will be set low
- telling the modem not to send again until the buffer is less than 90% full.
-
- Hardware flow control (DSR/DTR)
-
- Some strange modems need DSR (Data-Set-Ready) instead of CTS and DTR
- (Data-Terminal-Ready) or both options together, but it is not advised
- to ever use this option unless you are sure you know what you are doing.
- Data-Set-Ready is sometime refered as Modem-Ready (MR) on your modem.
-
- Use 16550 fifo if available
-
- Tests whether a 16550A is available in the serial chip and, if it is, uses
- its' FIFO buffer. Windows cannot use this by default.
-
- Keep 16550 fifo on in shell
-
- When calling an external program or exiting Terminate, we normally disable
- the FIFO buffer. Some utilities cannot detect the 16550A chip or do not
- support the FIFO. The best thing is to disable (No) and let external
- utilities detect for themselves.
-
- RTS low while writing
-
- If you do not have a 16550A chip and have problems with errors, you can try
- to set RTS low while writing. This means Terminate will stop receiving
- while writing protocol blocks to the disk. This will slow down performance
- a little, but is safer and could prevent hangups.
-
- Auto RTS low trigger
-
- If you get more than X errors then the Auto RTS low function can be set to
- go into progress, a good way of keeping up performance to a maximum and
- only turn on RTS low when really needed.
-
- Carrier detect mask
-
- When checking the modem status register this determines which bit should be
- used for checking carrier detect. Normally bit 7 (128) is used and you
- should only change this if you really know what you are doing.
-
- Init string
-
- Select which init string you want to sent to the modem after changing
- device and before dialing. This string is also sent to modem at startup
- if it is the current device.
-
- Restore port on close
-
- - 28 -
-
-
- After Terminate closes the port you can choose to restore the port as
- it was before. But this means that you will get hung up if Terminal
- ready was low at startup and you call any external program. You should
- only turn this on if you really know what you are doing.
-
- Close port in shell
-
- Normally there is no reason for closing the ports while shelling to
- DOS. But some external protocols might need this. Closing the port
- will save you a little in swap space, but if you are using fossil/ISDN
- you might get hung up if you close the port.
-
- Configure comports
-
- ╒═══════╡ Configure comports ╞╕
- │ Address Irq Vector │
- ├──────┬──────────────────────┤
- │ COM1 │ $03F8 04 0C │
- │ COM2 │ $02F8 03 0B │
- │ COM3 │ $03E8 04 0C │
- │ COM4 │ $02E8 03 0B │
- │ COM5 │ $4220 03 0B │
- │ COM6 │ $4228 03 0B │
- │ COM7 │ $5220 03 0B │
- │ COM8 │ $5228 03 0B │
- ╘══════╧══════════════════════╛
-
- When using the UART/Serial interface, you can change the actual port IO
- address, the hardware IRQ and the software interrupt.
-
- You should not need to change anything here, but if you do, you must
- beware of potential hardware conflicts. Do not try to change the IRQ on
- your internal modems or serial card without knowing exactly what you are
- doing. If you have an internal modem and 2 external comports, you should
- always choose COM1 for the mouse and COM4 for the modem. If you choose COM3
- you will conflict with IRQ4. Do not try changing the hardware jumpers/
- switches without help and a manual for the modem. Before you change
- anything on the modem, always make a note of the current jumper
- settings so you always can go back. If your internal modem is capable of
- using IRQ 5 or 7, please be aware that the modem could conflict
- with other hardware, like netcards or SoundBlaster cards. If it does not
- work at once with the internal modem, please seek professional help.
- It is your hardware supplier that is responsible for ensuring the modem
- works. Terminate uses only standard calls, so if the default settings do
- not work, contact your hardware supplier.
-
- Please always remember to turn off the power before doing anything.
- The vector number is where to install the software interrupt, this
- number should always be IRQ + 8. IRQ>7 = IRQ+$68
-
- IRQ0 , Vector $08 ( 8) Timer
- IRQ1 , Vector $09 ( 9) Keyboard
- IRQ2 , Vector $0A (10) Screen
- IRQ3 , Vector $0B (11) COM2,COM4
- IRQ4 , Vector $0C (12) COM1,COM3
- IRQ5 , Vector $0D (13) Free
- IRQ6 , Vector $0E (14) Floppy
- IRQ7 , Vector $0F (15) Free
- IRQ8 , Vector $70 (112)
-
- - 29 -
-
- IRQ9 , Vector $71 (113)
- IRQ10, Vector $72 (114)
- IRQ11, Vector $73 (115)
- IRQ12, Vector $74 (116)
- IRQ13, Vector $75 (117)
- IRQ14, Vector $76 (118)
- IRQ15, Vector $77 (119)
-
- These are the defaults for normal machines. If you have an internal
- modem that is capable of using IRQ 5 or 7, you should consider this.
- If you try to use IRQ0, IRQ1 orIRQ6 you could get in serious trouble
- and your machine could hang.
-
- Check IRQ
-
- ╒══════════════════════════════════════════════╡ Check IRQ ╞╕
- │ Found COM1, $03F8, testing...uses IRQ 4 │
- │ Found COM2, $02F8, testing...uses IRQ 3 │
- │ Found COM3, $03E8, testing...uses IRQ 4 │
- │ Found COM4, $02E8, testing...uses IRQ 5 │
- │ No chip COM5, $4220 │
- │ No chip COM6, $4228 │
- │ No chip COM7, $5220 │
- │ No chip COM8, $5228 │
- │ │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- This function tries to determine which hardware IRQ the comports are using.
- Even if this routine fails to find the IRQ, it will work anyway, if you
- specify the correct IRQ. Not all machines will show the correct IRQ.
-
- Set default values
-
- Set all devices to the default parameters. If you make some kind of
- mistake and cannot remember what you did wrong, you could use this
- function.
-
- Auto installation
-
- Detect IRQ's on ports and finds on which port your modem is connected.
- Test for maximum baudrate on device and select initstrings.
-
-
- - 30 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ General options ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- General options 1
-
- ╒══════════════════════╤══════════════════════════════╡ General options 1 ╞╕
- │ Swap method │ XMS/EMS/Disk │
- │ Swap when shelling │ On │
- │ Warning days │ 30 │
- │ ScrollBack buffer kb │ 32 │
- │ Time format │ 24-hour │
- │ Country code │ 45 Danmark │
- │ Pause time / char │ 30 . │
- │ Minimum diskspace │ 250000 │
- │ Tag char │ ■ │
- │ Edit background │ ░ │
- │ Online warn minutes │ 15 │
- │ Information time │ 15 │
- │ Max log size kb │ 64 │
- │ Inactivity seconds │ 1800 │
- │ Audio control │ 00:00 - 00:00 │
- │ Auto password │ 8 │
- │ Separators │ Thousand . Decimal , Date - Time . Lines ─ │
- │ Filefinder drives │ │
- │ Scan drives │ │
- │ Release buffer │ Yes │
- │ Menu background │ ▒ │
- ╘══════════════════════╧═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Swap method
-
- ┌─┤ Select swap method ├┐
- │ XMS/EMS/Disk │
- │ EMS/XMS/Disk │
- │ XMS/Disk │
- │ EMS/Disk │
- │ Disk │
- │ None │
- └───────────────────────┘
-
- Select the preferred way of swapping out memory when calling external
- utilities or invoking a shell to DOS. Remember that XMS is faster than EMS.
-
- Swap when shelling
-
- Swap out memory when shelling to DOS. If you don't have much memory left,
- you will need to enable this. Disabling this option will swap faster, but
- you will not have as much memory left in the DOS shell.
-
- Warning days
-
- Pressing W in the phonebook with this set means all entries you have not
- called in x days flash.
-
- ScrollBack buffer kb
-
-
- - 31 -
-
- How big the scrollback buffer Alt-B should be in bytes. The range that
- can be choosen is 16-128k, but don't use too great a value if you also have
- a big phonebook. If Terminate needs memory badly this buffer will be
- decreased to release resources to other functions.
-
- Time format
-
- Select 12 or 24 hour time format.
-
- Country code
-
- Selects your country code, installs international dial prefix and phone
- conversion for the point system. Currently Terminate supports almost
- 100 different countries, when showing timezones and using international
- dialprefixes.
-
- Pause time / char
-
- The pause option Alt-F3 will send the defined character every x seconds.
- The character to send every x seconds when using the pause function Alt-F3
-
- Minimum diskspace
-
- Terminate will check every 60 seconds if the diskspace where TERMINAT.EXE
- is located and exit if below this value. If you never want Terminate to
- exit because of low diskspace enter a '0'.
-
- Tag char
-
- Enter here the globally used character for tagging (in menus, etc.)
-
- Edit background
-
- Which character to use as a background in editing fields.
-
- Online warn minutes
-
- After how many minutes would you like to be warned that you have spent too
- much time on-line. 0 will disable warnings.
-
- Information time
-
- How long (1/10 second) some windows remain on screen. Increase this value
- if you think Terminate is too fast.
-
- Max log size kb
-
- When the logfile exceeds x kb it will be automatically reduced to half of
- the current size. This means you will never have to worry about deleting
- your logfile if it should get too big. 0 will disable this auto adjust.
-
- Inactivity seconds
-
- How many seconds in Terminal mode without any activity before Terminate
- automatically exits to DOS. 0 = disable.
-
- Audio control
-
- During which time period sound is allowed. 00:00 - 00:00 means that sound
- is always allowed.
-
- - 32 -
-
-
- Auto password
-
- When you edit any password and the field is blank, a random password is
- created with length x. This password will only consist of characters 'a..z'
- and '0..9'. If you never want these random passwords you can disable this
- feature by entering a zero here.
-
- Separators
-
- Separators for numbers, time and date vary according to your country
- codepage:
-
- Denmark USA
- Thousand : . ,
- Decimal : , .
- Date : - /
- Time : . :
-
- Lines are used in many places and are normally the graphics char '─' which
- will give you lines like this: ───────── in most places (phonebook report
- etc.). But if for some reason you want to change this, you can...
-
- Filefinder drives / Scan drives
-
- ╒╡ Drives ╞╕
- │ C: ■ │
- │ D: ■ │
- │ E: │
- │ F: ■ │
- ╘══════════╛
-
- When using the internal filefinder or the filemanager you can switch off
- testing of some drives (eg: CD-ROM drives or mapped network drives.)
-
- Release buffer
-
- If you want to free the scrollback buffer when calling any external program
- This allows you to swap faster, because less bytes have to be swapped
- to memory or disk, the buffer will still be saved if autosave scrollback
- is on (toggles), so if you never use the scrollback, turn it auto save off.
-
- Menu background
-
- The character that will be used to fill out the background of the screen
- in the configuration menus and in hostmode.
-
- General options 2
-
- ╒══════════════════════╤═════════════════════════╡ General options 2 ╞╕
- │ Status start offline │ Alt-Z for Help │
- │ Status start online │ System name │
- │ Status end offline │ Time 11:59:59 │
- │ Status end online │ kr 3,75 │
- ╘══════════════════════╧══════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- This menu controls what to show in the statusline and when to show it.
- You can manually change it with Alt-F1 (Start) and Alt-F2 (End).
-
- Status start offline : When No Carrier, show this at start of statusline
-
- - 33 -
-
- Status start online : When Carrier, show this at start of statusline
-
- Status end offline : When No Carrier, show this at end of statusline
- Status end online : When Carrier, show this at end of statusline
-
- External support
-
- ╒═════════════════════════════════════════════════╡ External support ╞╕
- │ │
- │ F1 Help @HELP │
- │ F2 Memo MEM /D |More !W │
- │ F3 Frmt FORMAT A: │
- │ F4 Vira C:\U\SCAN C: !M !E │
- │ F5 GSet GSETUP !M │
- │ F6 Echo ECHO %COMSPEC% %FD% %RA% %DIRCMD% %PATH% !W │
- │ F7 VPic VPIC !F !M │
- │ F8 Pack SHEZ !M │
- │ F9 Prnt DIR >PRN │
- │ F10 NCD NCD !M │
- │ F11 │
- │ F12 │
- │ │
- │ !P=COM1-8 !C=COM0-7 !0=DownPath !E=No COMMAND.COM │
- │ !M=Swap !W=Wait !B=Baud !L=LinkRate !I=Irq !A=Address │
- │ !F=FileName !CD=Change path !25,!30,!43,!50=Screen size │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Setup the utilities that can be called with Ctrl or Shift F1..F12 from
- terminal mode or in the filemanager. The first word is what will appear on
- the status line when holding down Ctrl and Shift. The parameters will be
- replaced with the correct value or turn on the option.
-
- !P
-
- Replace with current comport.
-
- !C
-
- Replace with current comport-1. COM1=0 COM2=0
-
- !0
-
- Replace with current download path.
-
- !E
-
- Call program directly without using COMMAND.COM.
-
- !M
-
- Swap out memory if program needs a lot of resources.
-
- !W
-
- Wait for return to be pressed before returning to Terminate.
-
- !B
-
- Replace with current baudrate.
-
- - 34 -
-
-
- !L
-
- Replace with current linkrate (14400)
-
- !F
-
- Name under cursor in filemanager.
-
- !CD
-
- Change to path where program is located before starting program.
-
- !25,!30,!43,!50
-
- Change screen size to 25 lines, 30 lines, 43 lines or 50 lines.
- Only possible on some systems.
-
-
- - 35 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Toggles ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
- ╒═══════════════════╤═════╤══════════════════╤═════╤═══════╡ Toggles ╞╤═════╕
- │ Blind support │ Off │ Auto save config │ On │ Show when Ctrl │ On │
- │ Deaf support │ Off │ Auto save his. │ On │ Show when Alt │ On │
- │ │ │ Auto update baud │ On │ Show when Ctrl+S.│ On │
- │ Sound │ On │ Backup cfg/phone │ On │ Baud in status │ On │
- │ Connect alarm │ On │ Second backup │ On │ │ │
- │ Transfer t. beep │ Off │ Save before dial │ Off │ Mouse │ Off │
- │ Key click │ Off │ Save scrollback │ On │ Enhanced keyb. │ On │
- │ │ │ Save tagfile │ On │ │ │
- │ Opening screen │ On │ Open logfile │ On │ Auto Ansi │ On │
- │ Closing screen │ On │ │ │ Flush Cache │ On │
- │ Ask start device │ Off │ Auto-open cap. │ On │ Import descript. │ On │
- │ Start in phone │ Off │ Overwrite cap. │ Off │ RegInfo bright │ On │
- │ Start in top │ Off │ Append capture │ Off │ Select Sort │ Off │
- │ Ask phone │ On │ Ctrl in capture │ Off │ Shell info. │ On │
- │ Phonebook after │ Off │ Capture keystrok.│ Off │ Tag advance │ On │
- │ Jump back t. phone│ Off │ Special capture │ Off │ Transfer info │ On │
- │ Dialer auto untag │ On │ │ On │ Transfer slice │ Off │
- │ Quick dialing bar │ Off │ Hide passwords │ On │ Wrap word chat │ On │
- │ Return aborts │ Off │ Password check. │ Off │ │ │
- │ Show big CONNECT │ Off │ Crypt cfg/fon │ Off │ │ │
- │ │ │ Ask at Alt-X │ Off │ │ │
- │ │ │ Ask at Alt-H │ Off │ Reset toggles │ │
- ╘═══════════════════╧═════╧══════════════════╧═════╧══════════════════╧═════╛
-
- Blind support
-
- Read BLIND.DOC for more information.
-
- Deaf Support
-
- Flash screen before making alarm or other bells generated by Terminate.
-
- Sound
-
- Turn on/off all alarms/beeps. You can also set a time period where
- sounds could be disabled.
-
- Connect alarm
-
- Make a sound when carrier is received.
-
- Transfer then beep
-
- Keep on beeping until any key is pressed after a file transfer is
- completed, will timeout after 60 seconds.
-
- Key click
-
- Make a click sound when pressing any key.
-
- Opening screen
-
- Skip the TERMINATE picture when starting (only registered users).
-
- - 36 -
-
-
- Closing screen
-
- When leaving Terminate you can disable the last screen.
-
- Ask start device
-
- If you are using several devices, it might be a useful feature for you
- to select the current device when starting up Terminate.
-
- Start in phone
-
- Jump directly to the phonebook at startup.
-
- Start in top
-
- After loading a phonebook, place menubar at the top.
-
- Ask phone
-
- When changing phonebooks (Alt-D) with P, this will ask if this phonebook
- should be default for the current device. If you think it is annoying
- just turn it off and it will make it the current book everytime you
- change book.
-
- Phonebook after
-
- When you get hung up by the system you just called or logoff the system,
- this function will allow you to force Terminate directly into the phonebook
- afterwards.
-
- Jump back to phone
-
- Upon a no connect string like BUSY or NO CARRIER, dialling is aborted and
- returns to phonebook.
-
- Dialer auto untag
-
- When you connect to a remote system, Terminate will untag all entries that
- have the same 5 first characters in the system name.
-
- Quick dialing bar
-
- Use Quick Dialling Bar in phonebook.
-
- Return aborts
-
- If enabled then Return will hangup the line instead of Escape when
- dialing from the phonebook.
-
- Show big CONNECT
-
- When carrier is detected a gigantic CONNECT picture will be shown.
-
- Auto save config
-
- Make sure your configuration is always saved.
-
- Auto save history
-
-
- - 37 -
-
- Save and load the contents of history strings at startup/closedown
- Look in Alt-F9 for more information.
-
- Auto update baud
-
- Update baudrate in phonebook to show the last connect rate obtained
- on that system.
-
- Backup cfg/phone
-
- Make backup files of:
-
- Configuration (.CBK)
- Phonebooks (.PBK)
- Note files (.NBK)
-
- Second backup
-
- The configuration and the phonebooks are the most important datafiles
- for Terminate. When you enable this function Terminate will create
- an extra backup of these files if Backup cfg/phone is enabled.
- Here is what actually is done:
-
- 1. Erase TERMINAT.2BK
- 2. Rename TERMINAT.PBK -> TERMINAT.2BK
- 3. Rename TERMINAT.FON -> TERMINAT.PBK
- 4. Write new TERMINAT.FON
-
- The same procedure is followed for the configuration and note files.
-
- Save before dial
-
- When you are installing a new device or setting up new drivers, you
- should save your phonebook before dialing, because if your driver does
- not work it could hang the machine and you would loose your changes.
- When you are sure everything works, you should turn off this function.
-
- Save scrollback
-
- Save the entire scrollback buffer and position in TERMINAT.SBK and reload
- next time you startup Terminate.
-
- Save tagfile
-
- Load latest tagfile at startup. The file is called TERMINAT.TBK and is
- placed in the Terminate directory. With this function both filenames and
- tagged filenames be remembered for next time.
-
- Open logfile
-
- Enable logfile at startup.
-
- Auto-open capture
-
- Enable the auto-open capture feature.
-
- Overwrite capture
-
- Force overwrite of capture when the auto-open feature is used.
-
-
- - 38 -
-
- Append capture
-
- Force appending to the old capture file when the auto-open feature is used.
-
- Ctrl in capture
-
- If disabled, then Ctrl codes will be filtered off in capture files.
-
- Capture keystroke
-
- When capturing with Alt-L or Autocapture. Then you can record all the
- keystrokes that you press in terminal mode by turning this on.
-
- Special Capture
-
- Capture keystroke must be enable to use this. If you press an A then [A,65]
- will be saved in the capture file. The 65 is the ASCII value for 'A'.
- Please do not abuse this function.
-
- Hide passwords
-
- If hide is on, all characters typed will be shown as dots on the screen
- when any password is entered.
-
- Password checking
-
- Use the password checker, when entering passwords.
- Terminate will warn you when your password that are too easy to guess.
- Terminate will search through the file of bad passwords called
- PASSWORD.BAD (Normally in the utility directory).
- You should never use passwords that only consist of numbers or the
- same letter like '911' or 'AAAA'. You should also never use your
- wife/girlfriend/children or any other human names, because they are
- the first names a hacker will try with. If you have a dog called
- Fido, you can mix in some numbers like: 'F0I1D2O3' nobody will then
- guess it because the combinations are too high and will take too many
- tries. If you only use these passwords, the only way a person can
- get your passwords is if he gets direct access to your computer or the
- system you are calling.
-
- Crypt cfg/fon
-
- Encrypt configuration file and all phonebooks next time they are
- saved. The encryption will change each time.
-
- Ask at Alt-X
-
- Ask: "Are you sure?" when pressing Alt-X in Terminal mode.
-
- Ask at Alt-H
-
- Asks if you are sure you want to hangup the line when pressing Alt-H.
-
- Show when Ctrl
-
- Change status line when holding down Ctrl in terminal mode
-
- Show when Alt
-
- Change status line when holding down Alt in terminal mode
-
- - 39 -
-
-
- Show when Ctrl+Sh
-
- Change status line when holding down Ctrl+Shift in terminal mode
-
- Baud in status
-
- When enabled Terminate will show the connect bps in the status line
- when you are online. The device speed is really not important because
- normally the port is locked at 19200 or 38400 (If using a modem faster
- than 2400 baud). If for some reason you don't want the connect bps
- to be shown you can turn it off here.
-
- Mouse
-
- Allow use of mouse.
-
- Enhanced keyboard
-
- Allow use of F11 and F12 on enhanced keyboard (AT).
-
- Auto ANSI
-
- Some systems send an ANSI request cursor position; if enabled Terminate
- will respond and the other end will assume you are capable of ANSI.
-
- Flush Cache
-
- Flush diskcache right after saving configuration and any phonebooks,
- to make sure nothing is lost.
-
- Import descript.
-
- When uploading, Terminate will search FILES.BBS/DESCRIPT.ION for a
- description of the file. When you are finished uploading and the system
- asks you for the description, you can press Alt-F9 and send that descript-
- ion. This will only operate if you select 16 or less files to upload.
-
- RegInfo bright
-
- If you bought Terminate PROFESSIONAL the registration information will
- be shown when pressing Alt-O. If you want to use dark gray when
- showing the information (almost invisible) turn this off.
- Does not work with all colours.
-
- Select sort
-
- When selecting for example phonebooks (FON) a small selector will pop
- op on screen. Yes, will sort the files alphabetically. No, will sort on
- time and put the newest on top.
-
- Shell information
-
- Show information on screen when calling external programs.
-
- Tag advance
-
- When anything is tagged, then jump to next line.
-
- Transfer info
-
- - 40 -
-
-
- Enable/Disable statusbar, activity bar and block information. If you
- suspect something is slowing down the system, then turning this off might
- improve the speed a little.
-
- Transfer slice
-
- Release some timeslices while transfering files, giving more time to
- the other tasks.
-
- Wrap word in chat
-
- Use wordwrap in chat mode.
-
- EMSI debug info
-
- Appends EMSI/IEMSI information to EMSI.TXT. This function should only
- be turned on for debugging purposes or if you simply just are curious
- about what actually goes on. This function will not work if network
- lock has been performed, to protect the security on larger installations.
- Remember to turn it off it you don't use it and erase EMSI.TXT.
-
- Alt-K infoscreen
-
- To help you understand the Alt-K function, a window is displayed with
- useful information the first time you press Alt-K from terminal mode.
- After a while you don't need this information anymore and should disable
- it here.
-
- Reset toggles
-
- Sets all toggles to 'factory' settings. These settings are the same as
- the first time you accessed this menu.
-
-
- - 41 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Modem and dialing ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- When sending strings to your modem, you can do some extra things:
-
- ~ 1/2 second pause
-
- << DTR low (should be set so your modem will hangup)
-
- >> DTR high
-
- ^A..^Z This allows you send control characters. A ^A will only send
- an ASCII #1, because the ASCII value of a 'A' is 65, then
- Terminate will deduct 64 and send that value instead.
- ^M = #13 = Carriage return. Most terminal programs allow
- you only to enter these values, but in Terminate you also
- press Alt-A to call the ASCII selector. Instead of having
- ATZ^M, you could enter ATZ and press Alt-A and choose the
- ASCII #13 sign.
- ^^ will send a ^ in case you need that.
-
- | Carriage return (#13).
- || will send a single |, sometimes you might need this if your
- username has a |. (Used at some 7-bit systems)
-
- Example: '<<~~~>>~ATZ^M'
-
- will lower DTR, wait 1.5 seconds, raise DTR, wait 0.5 seconds, send modem
- reset+#13.
- (DTR means Data-Terminal-Ready and is sometimes also refered to as TR on
- some modems.)
-
- ╒════════════════════╤════════════════════════════════╡ Modem and dialing ╞╕
- │ Install modem │ ^M Return ~ ½ sec. pause << DTR low >> DTR high │
- │ Init string │ │
- │ Dial prefix/suffix │ │
- │ Exit string │ │
- │ Connect string │ CONNECT │
- │ No connect strings │ NO CARRIER,BUSY,VOICE,NO DIAL TONE │
- │ Hang-up │ 100 ^M~~~+++~~~ATH0^M │
- │ Ring/Ok string │ RING^M^J OK^M │
- │ Dial time │ 45 seconds │
- │ Dial cancel string │ ^M~^M~ │
- │ Redial timers │ Delay: 2 Pause: 60 seconds │
- │ Auto-answer string │ ATA^M │
- │ Auto answer │ Off │
- │ Baud change │ Before: ~~~+++~~~ After: ATO^M │
- │ Modem string delay │ 0 │
- │ Force initstring │ No │
- ╘════════════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- - 42 -
-
-
- Install modem
-
- ╒╡ Total modems : 178 ╞══════╡ Modem Quick install ╞╕
- │ USRobotics 16800 Dual Standard w/FAX │
- │ USRobotics 16800 HST or Dual Standard │
- │ USRobotics Sportster 14400 │
- │ USRobotics Sportster 14400 FAX/modem │
- │ USRobotics Sportster 9600 v.32 │
- │ Ven-Tel 2400 Half Card (4 Option Switches) │
- │ Ven-Tel 2400 Half Card (6 Option Switches) │
- │ Ven-Tel 2400-33 │
- │ Ven-Tel Pathfinder 18K │
- │ ViVa 24m 2400 baud MNP-5 │
- │ Yoriko 9600/14400/Fax │
- │ Zoltrix 14400 FAX/modem │
- │ Zoltrix 9600 FAX/modem │
- │ ZOOM/Modem HC2400R │
- │ ZOOM/Modem MX2400R │
- │ ZOOM/Modem HC2400S (SendFax) │
- │ ZOOM/Modem MX2400S (SendFax) │
- │ ZOOM/Modem V.42bis (2400 baud) │
- │ ZOOM/Modem 14400 FAX/modem │
- │ ZyXEL U-1496, U-1496B, U-1496E V.32bis V.42bis │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Choose one of the default modems, from the modem database.
- Some of the settings will also allow you to save the configuration inside
- your modem, if the modem supports this. If you have already set up your
- modem you should not need to run this. The main reason for having this
- setup is because the factory defaults of most modem manufacturers do not
- give best performance. My first go old USRobotics Dual Standard modem took
- around a month back then, to get best performance out of. Newer modems like
- ZyXEL and others have now learnt how important it is to setup the modems
- correctly as burnt-in factory defaults that can be recalled with AT&F if a
- user makes a mistake. Setting up the modems from the factory will save
- many support call to your modem distributor and allow them to sell the
- modems even cheaper.
-
- Including your own modem in Terminate's database
-
- You can install your own TERMINAT.MOD file if you sell a modem that is
- not listed in the database using the TERMINAT.INS installation script.
- Look in DOCS\MODEMSET.DOC, create the structure in the file called
- TERMINAT.MOD. You cannot change TERMINAT.MOD yourself, but you can create
- your entries and send directly to us or to the nearest registration site.
-
- - 43 -
-
-
- Init strings
-
- ╒════════════════════╤════════════════════════════════════╡ Init strings ╞╕
- │ Init string 1 │ ATZ^M │
- │ Init string 2 │ ATZ^M~~~AT S7=60 S0=0 V1 X4^M │
- │ Init string 3 │ AT&C1&D2S0=0S7=60V1X4Z^M │
- │ Init string 4 │ │
- │ Init string 5 │ │
- │ Init string 6 │ │
- │ Init string 7 │ │
- │ Init string 8 │ │
- │ Init string 9 │ │
- │ Init string 10 │ │
- │ Send all │ No │
- ╘════════════════════╧════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- An init string will be sent right after startup and Terminate will not
- wait for any response from the modem. The best thing is always to save your
- setup inside the modem, if the modem supports that, and then only send an
- "ATZ^M" to reset the modem. Some modems are not capable of saving these
- settings and require the setup to be sent each time it has been turned off.
- You should always first try to make the modem hangup when lowering DTR.
- This is normally done by giving the command AT&D2, but look inside your
- manual to be sure. Then you should set the carrier detect to follow DCD
- (Data-Carrier-Detect) line, this is normally done by sending an AT&C1 to
- the modem.
- Another good init string that works with most modems:
-
- ATZ^M~~~AT S7=60 S0=0 V1 X4^M
-
- Reset modem, Set dial timeout to 60 seconds, set modem not to pickup phone,
- enable verbal response codes, enable extended response codes (like BUSY).
- All these command are HAYES commands, which almost every modem in the world
- supports. If you have a non-HAYES and no manual, you are in trouble...
-
- Here are some others you can try out if that does not work:
-
- ATS0=0Q0E1X4^M , ATE1X1Q0V1S7=60^M
-
- If you want Terminate to always start dialing a certain number you
- could also insert @DIAL 4 6 8. Where numbers are the entry numbers in
- the phonebook.
-
- Look below for more information on HAYES commands.
-
- Send all
-
- This function will allow you to send all init strings to the modem
- when starting up Terminate. This can only be used when you only have
- 1 modem attached. Remember to put some ~ characters after the init
- strings, otherwise your modem might not be fast enough for
- the commands. Remember if you have several devices (modems) attached
- only the line for that device will be sent. Blank init strings will
- not be sent to the modem.
-
- - 44 -
-
-
- Dial prefix/suffix
-
- ╒════════════════════╤═════════════╡ Prefix / Suffix ╞╕
- │ Dialing prefix 1 │ ATDT │
- │ Dialing prefix 2 │ ATDT │
- │ Dialing prefix 3 │ ATDT │
- │ Dialing prefix 4 │ ATDT │
- │ Dialing prefix 5 │ ATDP │
- │ International dial │ ATDT 009 │
- │ Dialing suffix 1 │ ^M │
- │ Dialing suffix 2 │ ^M │
- │ Dialing suffix 3 │ ^M │
- ╘════════════════════╧════════════════════════════════╛
-
- When dialing, the modem wants a dial command. The complete string it will
- build will look like this: prefix+number+suffix.
- Example: ATDT43623990^M
- The international prefix is for calling a system abroad.
- The different suffixes can be used if you have some kind of calling card
- and have to call another number first and enter a code or number.
-
- Remember when you are calling a system, that the terminal program is not
- responsible for getting the connect. Any terminal program just sends these
- commands to the modem, and waits for a reply from the modem. The reply is
- either a connect string and a carrier detect signal, or a no connect string
- like 'BUSY' or 'NO DIAL TONE'. So if you cannot get a connection you
- should never blame the terminal program. It is your modem that is not set
- up correctly. You must remember that not all modems will connect with
- each other and maybe need a special dial string to turn off MNP compression
- or something like that, but it depends on which modem you have.
- Generally if you cannot connect with a system, try turning all error
- correction and compression off and try again, that will allow you to
- connect to many systems anyway. Look in the modem manual for instructions
- on how to turn this off. If you have these problems with your modem, it
- will not help changing terminal programs, because it will not change
- anything at all. Sending 'ATDT' is done in the exact same way in all
- terminal programs.
-
- Exit string
-
- When leaving Terminate this string can be sent to your modem.
- Some pocket modems require the DTR to be set low, so it will turn off
- the use of the battery. This can be done by giving the command '<<'.
-
- Connect string
-
- All normal Hayes compatible modems will give you a result code starting
- with CONNECT when getting a carrier. Terminate will wait for this
- string and grab everything after it until a return (#13) or a maximum of 4
- seconds. This will be placed in the connect string which can be seen by
- pressing Shift-Esc everywhere. From this connect string the modem speed
- will be decided by Terminate. With a "CONNECT 14400/ARQ/V32", the connect
- speed will be set to 14400, which will be used for calculating CPS rates,
- performance percentages, etc.
-
- No connect strings
-
- When dialling another system, your modem will send back some strings
- to inform you that a connection could not be established. If your modem
-
- - 45 -
-
- is non-standard, you might need to change these.
-
- NO CARRIER This string will be returned if the timer S7 runs out.
-
- BUSY If the line is busy, this string will be returned, this
- may not always work. Old analog lines can have problems
- detecting busy at all, even though the modem should be able
- to. Some modems will even abort dialling if the BUSY
- response is enabled. If you have problems just change your
- dial command to ATX1DT instead of ATDT.
-
- VOICE Some modems can detect if it is a human answering the
- phone, then quickly abort the dial and pick up the phone.
- Some modems will try to trick you and sometimes tell
- you that you got a voice call, so if you have problems
- turn it off like the busy command or look in your manual.
-
- NO DIAL TONE When starting to dial, if the modem does not get a dial
- tone before the time set in the S6 register (default 2
- seconds), then the modem will give you this response.
-
- Hang-up
-
- It is very important your modem is capable of hanging up correctly. The
- best way is to set your modem to drop the carrier when the DTR
- (Data-Terminal-Ready) goes low. This is the fastest way of hanging up and
- is always preferred. You need to have a proper modem serial cable with all
- the correct pins connected and your modem correctly set (AT&D2 normally).
- The number you can edit is the time to hold down DTR before raising the
- line again in 1/100 seconds. 100 is 1 second and should be enough. If your
- modem is faster you can decrease this value. If there is no possible way to
- hang up by lowering DTR, you can send a string to your modem that should
- force the modem to hangup:
- ^M~~~+++~~~ATH0^M
- (Send return, wait 1.5 seconds, send +++ (go into command mode), wait 1.5
- seconds, send on-hook command.)
- If this does not work you need to consult your manual.
-
- Ring/Ok string
-
- The Ring string is used for identifying incoming calls in Terminal and in
- Host mode. When an incoming call arrives in terminal mode, a window will
- pop up and allow you to pick up the phone within 10 seconds.
-
- The OK string will be used in the hostmode to be sure that the modem has
- been reset correctly.
-
- Dial time
-
- Timeout for dialling in Terminate, remember you also must set the S7
- register. You should always set the S7 register to more than the Dial Time
- in Terminate, otherwise the modem will abort first with a NO CARRIER
- instead of Terminate saying timeout.
-
- Dial cancel string
-
- Hayes modems, will normally abort dialling when they receive a return
- (#13). The default for Terminate is ^M~^M~, send return, 1/2 second delay,
- send return, 1/2 second pause. But if your modem does not respond to this
- you could enter <~~> to hangup the line first before dialling.
-
- - 46 -
-
-
- Redial timers
-
- The delay timer is the pause time between calls.
- The pause timer is for how long to wait in seconds when all tagged numbers
- have been dialled before starting over. This means that after first calling
- all the tagged entries (with only the delay time between the calls),
- Terminate will then wait for the pause time. A good feature if you are
- calling a system with x lines and they are all busy since you can first try
- all the lines quickly and then delay some minutes and try all the lines
- again.
-
- Auto-answer string
-
- This string will tell your modem to try connecting when an incoming
- call arrives or to connect in the hostmode.
-
- Auto answer
-
- When an incoming call arrives in terminal mode, if OFF then you will be
- asked to pick up the phone, if ON then the Auto-answer string will be
- sent to the modem.
-
- Baud change
-
- When a connection has been made and you have told Terminate to change
- baudrate (only when using 2400 baud and calling a 1200 baud system). Then
- this command must be used.
-
- Modem string delay
-
- If your modem reacts very slowly, you can insert a delay when sending
- strings to the modem. Also all Function keys will then have this delay.
-
- Force initstring
-
- Normally Terminate will not send the init. string if the modem has
- detected carrier, but you can force Terminate to send the string at startup
- even if the carrier is high. This is useful when you have a modem that
- cannot save the setup and the carrier (&C0) is set when turning on the
- modem.
-
- - 47 -
-
-
- RS-232C INTERFACE
-
- DB-25 (25 pin connectors)
-
- Pin Assignment Short Signal Flow
- ───────────────────────────────────────────────────
- 1 Chassis Ground GND Terminal <-> Modem
- 2 Transmit data TR Terminal --> Modem
- 3 Receive data RD Terminal <-- Modem
- 4 Request to send RTS Terminal --> Modem
- 5 Clear to send CTS Terminal <-- Modem
- 6 Data set ready DSR Terminal <-- Modem
- 7 Signal ground GND Terminal <-> Modem
- 8 Carrier detect DCD Terminal <-- Modem
- 20 Data terminal ready DTR Terminal --> Modem
- 22 Ring indicator RI Terminal <-- Modem
-
- DB-9 (9 pin connectors)
-
- Pin Assignment Short Signal Flow
- ───────────────────────────────────────────────────
- 1 Carrier detect DCD Terminal <-- Modem
- 2 Transmit data TR Terminal --> Modem
- 3 Receive data RD Terminal <-- Modem
- 4 Data terminal ready DTR Terminal --> Modem
- 5 Signal ground GND Terminal <-> Modem
- 6 Data set ready DSR Terminal <-- Modem
- 7 Request to send RTS Terminal --> Modem
- 8 Clear to send CTS Terminal <-- Modem
- 9 Ring indicator RI Terminal <-- Modem
-
- Lines 2,3,4,5,6,8,20,22 (DB-25) or line 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9 (DB-9)
- are sometimes referred to as 'The big eight'.
-
- - 48 -
-
-
- HAYES
-
- There is no guarantee that all the commands will work with your modem,
- but if you have some special needs, you might like to change the settings.
- It is not possible to make a complete list of all commands, since most
- modem manufacturers have their own special settings.
-
- ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ HAYES STANDARD COMMANDS │
- ├──────────┬──────────────┬────────────────────────────────────┬───────────┤
- │ Command │ Parameters │ Function │ Default │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ AT │ │ Attention code; indicates start │ │
- │ │ │ of command line. │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ +++ │ │ Escape code; changes modem from │ │
- │ │ │ on-line to command state; see │ │
- │ │ │ registers S2 and S12. │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ D<s> │ │ Dial │ DP │
- │ │ s = 0..9 # * │ │ │
- │ │ () - . / │ │ │
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ │ P │ Pulse dial │ │
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ │ R │ Dial an "originate-only" │ │
- │ │ │ modem (reverse mode) │ │
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ │ T │ Touch Tone(tm) dial │ │
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ │ , │ Pause when dialing │ │
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ │ ; │ Return to command state │ │
- │ │ │ after dialling │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ A/ │ │ Repeat command; redial; the │ │
- │ │ │ only command neither preceded │ │
- │ │ │ by AT nor followed by a │ │
- │ │ │ carriage return │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ A │ │ Answer call immediately │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ E<n> │ n = 0,1 │ 0 = no echo │ E1 │
- │ │ │ 1 = echo │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ F<n> │ n = 0,1 │ 0 = half-duplex │ F1 │
- │ │ │* 1 = full-duplex │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ I<n> │ n = 0..? │ information │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ L<n> │ n = 0..? │ volume control │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ M<n> │ n = 0..2 │ 0 = speaker OFF │ M1 │
- │ │ │* 1 = speaker ON until carrier │ │
- │ │ │ 2 = speaker always ON │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ O │ │ Return to on-line state │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ Q<n> │ n = 0,1 │ 0 = result codes sent │ Q0 │
-
- - 49 -
-
- │ │ │ 1 = result codes not sent │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ S<r>? │ r = 0..17 │ Read register r │ None │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ S<r>=<n> │ r = 0..17 │ Set register r to value n │ None │
- │ │ n = 0..255 │ │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ V<n> │ n = 0,1 │ 0 = digit result codes │ V1 │
- │ │ │* 1 = word result codes │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ X<n> │ n = 0..? │ 0 = basic result code set │ │
- │ │ │ 1 = extended result code set │ X0 │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ Z │ │ Reset │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ C<n> │ n = 0,1 │ 0 = transmitter OFF │ C1 │
- │ │ │* 1 = transmitter ON │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ H<n> │ n = 0..1 │ 0 = ON hook (hang up) │ None │
- │ │ │ 1 = OFF hook │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ &C<n> │ n = 0,1 │ 0 = carrier always on │ &C0 │
- │ │ │* 1 = carrier follow DCD line │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────────┼────────────────────────────────────┼───────────┤
- │ &D<n> │ n = 0,1,2,3 │ 0 = Do not hangup when DTR is low │ &D0 │
- │ │ │ 1 = return to command-state DTR │ │
- │ │ │* 2 = when DTR low, hang up modem │ │
- │ │ │ 3 = same as 2, but also resets │ │
- └──────────┴──────────────┴────────────────────────────────────┴───────────┘
- * = advised
-
- ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ HAYES STANDARD REGISTERS │
- ├──────────┬──────────┬───────────┬──────────────────────────────┬─────────┤
- │ Register │ Range │ Units │ Function │ Default │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ │ │ --DIALLING-- │ │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- │ S6 │ 2..255 │ seconds │ Wait time for dial tone │ 2 │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S8 │ 0..255 │ seconds │ Length of pause (caused │ 2 │
- │ │ │ │ by comma) │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S11 │ 50..255 │ milli- │ Duration and spacing of │ 70 │
- │ │ │ seconds │ Touch-Tones (tm) │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ │ │ --ANSWERING-- │ │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- │ S0 │ 0..255 │ rings │ Number of rings on which │ 0 │
- │ │ │ │ modem answers call │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S1 │ 0..255 │ rings │ Number of rings occurred │ 0 │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ │ │ --DIALING & ANSWERING-- │ │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- │ S7 │ 1..255 │ seconds │ Wait time for carrier │ 30 │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S9 │ 1..255 │ .1 second │ Carrier detect response time │ 6 │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S10 │ 1..255 │ .1 second │ Time between loss of carrier │ 7 │
-
- - 50 -
-
- │ │ │ │ and hang up │ │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ │ │ --CHARACTER DEFINITIONS-- │ │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- │ S2 │ 0..127 │ ASCII │ Escape code character │ 43 │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S3 │ 0..127 │ ASCII │ Carriage return character │ 13 │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S4 │ 0..127 │ ASCII │ Line feed character │ 10 │
- ├──────────┼──────────┼───────────┼──────────────────────────────┼─────────┤
- │ S5 │ 0..32,127│ ASCII │ Backspace character │ 8 │
- └──────────┴──────────┴───────────┴──────────────────────────────┴─────────┘
-
-
- - 51 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Filenames and paths ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- For Paths that do not start with a \ or a drive:\, (C:\) is assumed always
- to be within the Terminate home path. So DOWNLOAD\ would actually be:
- C:\TERMINAT\DOWNLOAD\, so you will save a little typing:
-
- ╒═════════════════════════╤═════════════════════════╡ Filenames and paths ╞╕
- │ Download manager │ │
- │ Upload directory │ UPLOAD\ │
- │ Script directory │ │
- │ Translation file │ .XLT │
- │ Phonebook directory │ PHONE\ │
- │ Capture directory │ CAPTURE\ │
- │ Capture file │ TERMINAT.CAP │
- │ Log file │ TERMINAT.LOG │
- │ Editor filename │ Q.EXE !M │
- │ Line command │ -N@LINE │
- │ Viewer filename │ LIST.COM │
- │ Protocol directory │ PROTOCOL\ │
- │ Shell directory │ │
- │ Swap file │ TERMINAT.SWP │
- │ Utility directory │ UTILS\ │
- │ Manual directory │ MANUAL\ │
- │ Run after download │ │
- │ Run after upload │ │
- │ Qwk reply files │ DANBBS.REP │
- │ Semaphore directory │ │
- │ Exit file │ TER-EXIT.NOW │
- │ Filelist manager │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════╧════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- - 52 -
-
-
- Download manager
-
- ╒════════════════════╤═════════════════════════════╡ Download manager ╞╕
- │■Default download │ Use wildcards │
- │ Download path 1 │ DOWNLOAD\ │
- │ Download path 2 │ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ │
- │ Download path 3 │ DOWNLOAD\ │
- ├────────────────────┼─────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ *.GIF │ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ │
- │ *.PCX │ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ │
- │ *.JPG │ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ │
- │ *.GFB │ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ │
- │ *.BMP │ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ │
- │ *.QWK │ C:\QWK\ │
- │ *.OPX │ C:\XPRESS\ │
- │ NODEDIFF.* │ C:\TERMINAT\UTILS │
- │ Z?-DIFF.* │ C:\TERMINAT\UTILS │
- │ │ DOWNLOAD\ │
- │ │ DOWNLOAD\ │
- │ │ DOWNLOAD\ │
- │ │ DOWNLOAD\ │
- │ *MAIL │ IN\ │
- │ *ARCHIVE │ DOWNLOAD\ARCHIVES\ │
- │ *.* │ DOWNLOAD\OTHER\ │
- ╘════════════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Terminate allows you to have 3 different download directories, which can be
- set for each phonebook entry, so if you call systems with one kind of file,
- lets say OS/2 files, you would surely not want them to get mixed up with
- your normal DOS files. The wildcard system in Terminate allows you to
- specify any DOS wildcard (*,?) and the directory where to save the files.
- This will also work when using the point system.
- If you change the first wildcard path you will be asked if this path
- should be copied to all wildcard paths.
-
- *MAIL Is a wildcard for mailpackages MO#, TU#, WE#, TH#, FR#, SA#, SU#
- where the # is a number from 0-9.
- *ARCHIVE Is a wildcard for the most popular archivers, currently
- supported: ARC,ARJ,ZIP,LHA,LZH,DWC,SQZ,ZOO,PAK,HYP,RAR,EXE
- Will also match when the two first characters matches and
- the 3 is a number from 0-9, like: AR1, ZI5 etc.
-
- Upload directory
-
- When starting an upload, you can force the filemanager always to start in
- this directory.
-
- Script directory
-
- When scripts are ready in Terminate, they will be placed here
-
- Translation file
-
- Which XLT file should default to be loaded at startup. No filename here
- means no translation, which is normal.
-
- Phonebook directory
-
- Where to place phonebooks (*.FON), phonebook backups (*.PBK),
-
- - 53 -
-
- translation files (*.XLT) and keyboard mapping files (*.KBD).
-
- Capture directory
-
- Where all the capture files should be stored *.CAP
-
- Capture file
-
- Which file should be the default when pressing Alt-L (capture) or
- Alt-I (Screen image)
-
- Log file
-
- Name of the logfile. Terminate will keep this file open all the time if the
- logfile toggle is ON. A problem would occur when using networks because you
- cannot write to the same file from several Terminates. You will have to
- define different logfiles or turn it off. You could enter the name
- TER%NET%.LOG and then have an environment variable in your AUTOEXEC.BAT:
- SET NET=04 and then have a separate number for each machine. Terminate will
- then replace the %NET% so the filename would be TER04.LOG
-
- Editor filename
-
- An external editor is something you must have. I admit that people are used
- to different editors and hate learning new keys. Qedit seems to be one of
- the most used and is surely one of the best. You can request or download
- QEDIT from DAN BBS. You should put a !M on the line, so memory will be
- swapped out before calling the editor.
-
- Line command
-
- The @LINE is where the line number is replaced when needed. This is
- for example used when you edit one of the manual files. Then Qedit
- can start up and place the cursor on the same line as in Terminate.
-
- Viewer filename
-
- A viewer is a program that will allow you to look in big files without
- editing. Terminate has a built-in filelister, which works almost like
- the original LIST.COM program by Vernon D. Buerg. Use @LIST for the
- internal lister or give the entire filename here. Just remember that with
- the internal lister, you can grab and import to all other functions like
- the SmartNote (Alt-A) or the history strings (Alt-F9).
-
- The internal lister
-
- Use normal cursor movements to browse the file.
-
- F Search for a keyword
- F3 Search for same keyword again
- F9 Search for same keyword again backwards
- H Toggle hexmode
- Alt-K String grabber (Shift cursor to adjust size)
- T Tag files
-
- Protocol directory
-
- If you do not give any path with the external protocols, this directory
- will be assumed.
-
-
- - 54 -
-
- Shell directory
-
- When shelling to DOS with Alt-J, change to this directory. You could enter
- a C:\ if you want to have the root directory as current when shelling. If
- blank, then the Terminate directory will be used. In the filemanager
- Terminate will always change to the current directory in the current
- window.
-
- Swap file
-
- If you do not have enough XMS or EMS memory, Terminate will swap the memory
- to a swapfile. You should define a different swapfile for each person that
- runs Terminate if you are on a network. Use the environment variables to
- fix this like the logfile: TER%NET%.SWP
-
- Utility directory
-
- When opening some files, this directory will first be searched.
- Place all other files that have nothing to do directly with Terminate in
- this directory and don't ever allow the Terminate home directory (eg:
- C:\TERMINAT) to be filled with all kinds of garbage.
-
- Some of the files that should be placed in here are:
-
- MAGIC.TXT List of magic names for the point system
- NODELIST.000 Nodelists for the point system
- PASSWORD.BAD Bad passwords for the password checker
- PASSWORD.TXT Passwords for the point system
- TERMINAT.CST Costfile
- TERMINAT.EXT Extensions for the file manager
- TERMINAT.LGO File to show at startup if registered
- TERMINAT.MOD Quick modem install
- WELCOME.ASC Welcome picture for the hostmode
-
- Manual directory
-
- Where to search for the help and manual files, if you run several
- Terminate's on a network you can save diskspace by using the same
- manual files.
-
- Run after download Run after upload
-
- After an internal or external download/upload, this program or batch file
- can be called. This could be useful if you have some kind of program
- to import descriptions into a FILES.BBS file, for example.
- !0 on commandline will be replaced with the current download directory.
-
- Qwk reply files
-
- When you write offline mail with an offline reader like TMAIL or other
- QWK readers. Then your messages will be saved in a file. This file should
- be specified here. When you then upload the file Terminate will delete
- it afterwards.
-
- Semaphore directory
-
- This directory will contain the exit file, look below for more information.
-
- Exit file
-
-
- - 55 -
-
- The exit file is used to force Terminate to shutdown without actually being
- at this workstation. Terminate will look if the exit file exists at startup
- and will only exit if someone touches (change filedate/time) this file.
- You can also delete the file and create it again in a batchfile like this:
-
- DEL C:\TERMINAT\TER-EXIT.NOW
- ECHO hello>C:\TERMINAT\TER-EXIT.NOW
-
- On a network you should turn this off or have the directory to point a
- place where Terminate only have read access, so the users cannot force
- other tasks down. If you want to be able to shut a particular Terminate
- down use SET NET=1 and have TER-EXIT.NO%NET% as exit file.
- The places from where you can shut Terminate down:
-
- The hostmode
- The point system
- The fax receive
- Terminal mode
-
- Filelist manager
-
- You will probably download a lot of filelists from a lot of different
- systems. To quickly access and tag files from these filelists, you
- can press Alt-F6 and F, select the filelist and tag files with T.
- You MUST have a seperate directory for the filelists, which ONLY contain
- filelists and information that can be packed into the archives. Please
- do not try to mix up other files. For security reasons you cannot
- use the Terminate path or the ROOT of any drive.
- The Pack and Unpack commands are used to save space on your hard disks,
- since filelists are not used all the time and can easily be stored in
- a way that only uses half or less diskspace.
-
-
- - 56 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Protocols ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ╒════════════════╤══════╡ Protocol options ╞╕
- │ Internal │ │
- │ External │ │
- │ Default │ Zmodem │
- │ Allow auto │ Yes │
- ╘════════════════╧══════════════════════════╛
-
- Default
-
- Where to put the cursor as the default when pressing Page-Up or Page-Down.
-
- Allow auto
-
- Global switch for allowing auto-download for all protocols.
-
- Internal protocols
-
- ╒═════════════════════╤╡ Internal protocols ╞╕
- │ Enable protocols │ │
- │ CPS adjust │ 5 % │
- │ Hangup after time │ 10 │
- │ Hangup default │ No │
- │ │ │
- │ Zmodem/ZedZap: │ │
- │ Allow CRC-32 │ Yes │
- │ Allow recovery │ Yes │
- │ Check file date │ No │
- │ Touch file │ No │
- │ Increase filename │ Yes │
- │ Always overwrite │ No │
- │ Zmodem signature │ rz..** │
- │ Auto upload │ Yes │
- │ │ │
- │ ASCII send/receive │ │
- ╘═════════════════════╧══════════════════════╛
-
- Enable protocols
-
- ╒═════════════════════════╤═════╡ Enable/disable protocols ╞╕
- │ ■ Z Zmodem │ The most used protocol │
- │ ■ P ZedZap │ Zmodem 8k for 2 Terminates │
- │ ■ A Ascii │ Text files │
- │ ■ X Xmodem │ Not good, last choice │
- │ ■ 1 Xmodem 1k │ Not good, last choice │
- │ ■ E Xmodem 1k-G │ Fast, but not good │
- │ ■ Y Ymodem Batch │ Ok, but Zmodem is better │
- │ ■ G Ymodem-G │ No correction, only with MNP │
- │ ■ K Kermit │ Host/Server/Unix │
- │ ■ C CIS Quick B+ │ CompuServe │
- ╘═════════════════════════╧═════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Press SPACE to toggle use, if you disable some of these protocols,
- then they will also be disabled in the hostmode. Press RETURN to change
-
- - 57 -
-
- the hotkey.
-
- CPS adjust
-
- If you think your CPS rate is a little wrong you can adjust the values by
- telling how many percent Terminate should add. Many external protocols
- will claim that they get a much higher CPS rate than possible or use
- other expressions like 'throughput', 'speed' etc. and then people will
- think that their protocol is much faster. Don't be fooled, Zmodem is
- still one of the fastest, and it is normally not worth the work to setup
- an external protocol, unless it is a full duplex protocol like BiModem,
- HSLink, Janus or HydraCom, which transfers files both ways at the same
- time. Remember even if an external protocol gives you 1-2% faster
- transfers that time will be lost just by swapping out memory and calling
- the protocol.
-
- Hangup after time
-
- When using the internal protocols you can toggle if you want to hangup
- right after the transfer. This option allows you to choose how many
- seconds to wait before hanging up.
-
- Hangup default
-
- When transferring files, which value should be used as default.
- If Yes, then Terminate will try to hangup after every transfer. You
- can also change this value while transfering files by pressing 'H',
- only available with internal protocols. If Yes then after a download
- with an external protocol, Terminate will countdown and hangup if
- not aborted. Please remember that you should only hangup after a
- transfer if you are allowed by the sysop. A lot of sysops do not
- like this, so please ask him/her first.
-
- Zmodem/ZedZap:
-
- Zmodem is the most used protocol in the world now, it has many special
- features and allows you to control a few things.
- When auto-downloading with ZedZap 8k, instead of Zmodem, the other
- end must send a 'ZAP' before the normal Zmodem string, then Terminate
- will start up ZedZap instead. This is currently only supported by
- the internal hostmode in Terminate.
-
- Allow CRC-32
-
- CRC means 'cyclic redundancy check' and is for checking if a block
- received or sent was error free. A very few, old Zmodems might only
- support CRC-16 check, which is less secure than the CRC-32 check.
- You should only turn this off in very rare cases.
-
- Allow recovery
-
- If a file transfer is aborted, you can resume the transfer where you left
- off if this feature is enabled.
-
- Check file date
-
- When resuming a transfer, Terminate will test to see if the filesize is
- the same this time, but you can also set Terminate to test the file date
- / time. (In this case, Touch File should not be enabled.)
-
-
- - 58 -
-
- Touch file
-
- Zmodem will also transfer the original file date/time stamp. If you
- enable this option, all files received will be touched with the current
- date/time.
-
- Increase filename
-
- If the file already exists and Terminate decides not to recover the
- file, Terminate will increment the filename like this:
- DANBBS.ARJ -> DANBBS.AR1
- If DANBBS.AR1 exits Terminate will keep on incrementing, first 1..9, then
- A..Z, then abort.
-
- Always overwrite
-
- With this option Terminate does not check if the file already exists and
- simply overwrites the existing file.
-
- Zmodem signature
-
- In terminal mode Terminate will scan for this string if autodownload is
- enabled. When Terminate gets this string Zmodem download will start.
- On some systems you need to shorten this string into: 'rz'+#13 , but
- normally you should not change this.
-
- Auto upload
-
- When a '**'#24'B01' is received then Terminate will assume an upload is
- wanted and enter the protocol selection menu.
-
- ASCII send/receive
-
- ╒═══════════════════════════════╡ ASCII transfer ╞╕
- │ Settings for Receive/view and Send/view │
- │ │
- │ Strip high bit Off │
- │ Remote abort char 24 (ASCII) │
- │ │
- │ ─ Send ─ │
- │ │
- │ Local echo On │
- │ Blank line -=> 1 Space On │
- │ Line pacing 0 (1/10 seconds) │
- │ Character pacing 0 (1/10 seconds) │
- │ CR translation None │
- │ LF translation None │
- │ │
- │ ─ Receive ─ │
- │ │
- │ CR translation None │
- │ LF translation None │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Strip high bit
-
- Strip away characters with ascii values above 127.
-
- Remote abort char
-
- - 59 -
-
-
- If this option is not #0 then the remote can abort the transfer by
- sending this character (normally #24 (Ctrl-X) is used).
-
- Local echo
-
- When transferring a file, this allows you to see what it is you are
- sending.
-
- Blank line -=> 1 Space
-
- Some BBS editors will abort on blank lines, so this option will
- take blank lines and turn them into a single space.
- #13#10 -=> #20#13#10 = Blank, carriage return (CR), linefeed (LF)
-
- Line pacing
-
- How many 1/10 second to wait between each line. Some BBS editors are not
- fast enough to accept all the characters if you just send a lot of lines
- without a pause.
-
- Character pacing
-
- If you want it to be real slow, you can also make a pause between each
- character - but this is slow and is not advised.
-
- CR translation LF translation
-
- When sending or receiving carriage returns and linefeeds you can change
- or strip them with this option. This is only used in special cases and
- should not normally be changed.
- A CR can be either stripped or changed into either a LF or CR+LF.
- Same goes for a LF.
-
- External protocols
-
- ╒══════════╡ External protocols ╞╕
- │ ■ Puma/Mpt │
- │ ■ BiModem │
- │ ■ HSlink │
- │ ■ Super Zmodem │
- │ ■ Lynx │
- │ ■ CMP - Chatmanager │
- │ ■ Jmodem │
- │ ■ Zmodem external │
- │ ■ Zmodem GIFLINK │
- │ ■ Fax receive │
- │ Free slot │
- │ Free slot │
- ╘════════════════════════════════╛
-
- External protocols are often used by experienced comms. users.
- Transferring files has become some kind of artform, where everybody tries
- to outdo each other. The internal Zmodem is often the preferred protocol,
- since otherwise it can sometimes be impossible to keep track of how many
- files have been downloaded. Especially on networks or in multitasking
- environments, where several people have access to the download directory.
-
- Terminate calculates the bytes downloaded by first checking the download
- directory size before and after the protocol has been called. Then the
-
- - 60 -
-
- CPS rate is calculated based upon the time from leaving Terminate until
- back in Terminate again. If you are in a multitasking environment, please
- do not delete or change any files in the download directory while an
- external transfer is in progress. I have set up all the most popular
- protocols and a lot of people have tested the settings, but there can be
- many, many problems setting up an external protocol if you haven't tried
- it before. Don't believe that the actual CPS rate that external protocols
- claim to achieve is always correct, there are some limitations that are
- impossible to exceed and still some protocols claim to be better than
- is physically possible. Another reason for using an external protocol is
- that it offers some special things that are not included in the terminal
- package, like the BiModem/HSLink which are full duplex protocols (that
- means you can transfer files both ways at the same time and even chat).
- These are high-tech protocols and impossible to implement in a terminal
- program because the specifications are not released. Well, if you are a
- newcomer, there will be a while before you will need these.
-
- ╒═══════════════════╤═══════════════════════════════════╡ Change protocol ╞╕
- │ Protocol name │ Zmodem external │
- │ Information │ The immortal protocol │
- │ [Path]+Filename │ GSZ.EXE │
- │ Ask at downloads │ No │
- │ Change to UL dir │ Yes │
- │ Change to DL dir │ Yes │
- │ Batch │ Yes │
- │ Hotkey │ Z │
- │ │ !P=COM1-8 !C=COM0-7 !0=DownloadPath !E=No COMMAND.COM│
- │ │ !M=Swap !W=Wait !B=Baud! L=Linkrate !I=Irq !A=Address│
- │ Upload parameters │ handshake on port !P speed !B sz │
- │ Download param. │ handshake on port !P speed !B pB4096 rz -Z -m -rr │
- │ Auto-download │ Yes │
- │ Signature │ rz.**. │
- │ Signature hex │ 727A0D2A2A180000000000000000000000000000 │
- ├───────────────────┴──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ If [Path] not is used, protocol path will be used instead. │
- │ A signature is the chars that the sending protocol is sending to start. │
- │ Zmodem looks almost like this: rz**B0000000000 You can monitor a new │
- │ protocol with the ASCII download (PgDn,A), and then convert the bytes to │
- │ hex. Just a small part of the signature (5-10 chars at most) is needed │
- │ depending on how redundant it is. All 00 at the end are ignored. │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Protocol name
-
- The name that is presented in the menus.
-
- Information
-
- Any information you would like to see in the menus.
-
- [Path]+Filename
-
- Filename of the protocol. If no path is supplied then the protocol
- directory will be used.
-
- Ask at downloads
-
- Ask the filename, should only be used with non-batch protocols.
-
- Change to UL dir
-
- - 61 -
-
-
- Before starting the external protocol, change to upload directory.
- Some external protocols are limited to not allow the upload directory
- in unregistered versions.
-
- Change to DL dir
-
- If you change to the download directory, then you will normally not
- have to enter a path on the command line, because the external protocol
- will then use the current directory.
-
- Batch
-
- Batch protocol means that it can transfer several files after each
- other. Protocols like Zmodem, Bimodem, Hslink and Ymodem Batch are batch
- protocols while Xmodem is a not.
-
- Hotkey
-
- Which key should activate this protocol in the protocol menu.
-
- Upload parameters / Download param.
-
- When using an external protocol you will need to send some parameters
- to the program, to tell the program the port, baudrate and other
- information it might need.
-
- !P Replace !P with port-number. If you are using COM2 then !P
- will be replaced with a '2'.
-
- !C Same as above but some protocols use port 0..7 instead of 1..8
- If you are using COM2 then !P will be replaced with a '1'.
-
- !B Replace !B with baudrate.
-
- !L Replace !L with connect baud rate.
-
- !0 Replace !0 with downloadpath, example: C:\TERMINAT\DOWNLOAD\
-
- !M Swap Terminate out to memory or disk first, try first without
- this parameter and see if you have enough memory to run it without
- swapping. This will increase the start of the protocol.
-
- !W Wait for return before returning to Terminate.
- You can use this for testing the protocol, if the protocol
- gives you some kind of error message and the screen clears too
- fast to see it.
-
- !E Do not use a second COMMAND.COM, call directly.
- If you use this parameter then you must give the complete
- path+filename+ext, like: C:\PROTOCOL\HSLINK.EXE !E !M
-
- !I Replace with current comport IRQ.
-
- !A Replace with current hardware port address of comport.
-
- Auto-download
-
- Test for incoming signature and try to start the protocol without
- having to press PageDown and select the protocol manually.
-
- - 62 -
-
-
- Signature Signature hex
-
- You can either edit the signature as a string and enter special
- characters with the Alt-A function or you can enter the signature
- in hexnumbers. Look at all the default external protocols for
- more examples.
-
- Transfering files
-
- ╒══════════════╤══════════════╤═════════════════╤════════╤╡ File transfer ╞╕
- │ Protocol │ Zmodem │ Total errors │ │ │
- │ Check/size │ Crc32/1024 │ Total blocks │ 1843 │ Request file │
- │ File name │ DANBBS.ARJ │ Blocks rcvd │ 13 │ Start file │
- │ File size │ 1886640 │ Blocks left │ 1830 │ Synchronize │
- │ Bytes rcvd │ 13312 │ Total kr │ 9,71 │ Received block │
- │ Bytes left │ 1873328 │ Costs kr │ 0,07 │ Received block │
- ├──────────────┼──────────────┼─────────────────┼────────┤ Received block │
- │ Throughput │ 1560 CPS │ Estimated time │ 20.34 │ Received block │
- │ Efficiency │ 163% │ Elapsed time │ 0.09 │ Received block │
- │ Diskspace │ 873.673.728 │ Remaining time │ 20.26 │ Received block │
- ├──────────┬───┴──────────────┴─────────────────┴────────┤ Received block │
- │ Activity │ ████████████████████████████████████ │ Received block │
- │ Progress │ 0% ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ Received block │
- │ Connect │ CONNECT 9600/ARQ/HST/HST/V42BIS │ Received block │
- │ Status │ Ok │ Received block │
- │ Log │ │ Received block │
- │ Path │ DOWNLOAD\ │ Received block │
- │ Device │ COM2 19200 8N1 │ │
- ├──────────┴─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┤ │
- │ Software flow Off │ Hardware flowcontrol CTS/RTS │ │
- │ Hangup after No │ RTS low while writing No │ │
- │ Skip rest of file │ Baud 9600 │ │
- ╘════════════════════════╧═══════════════════════════════╧═════════════════╛
- DAN BBS Line 1 │ COM2: 19200·8N1 FX │ Avatar/Ansi │L │kr 0,42
-
- This is the transfer window which is used while transfering files from or
- to your system. Most of the information is quite obvious, but some entries
- need an explanation.
-
- Total / Costs
-
- If you are using the cost system in Terminate here you will be able to
- see how much the file will cost to send for you or the remote site.
- You can also see in the status line what the total is for this call.
-
- Disk space
-
- Terminate will only test diskspace before each file and calculate the
- remaining disk space. Since most files you receive will be compressed
- you must have as much space as the size of the file you are about to
- receive, even when you are using compressed drives, like Stacker,
- DoubleDos or Novell DOS. If you are running out of disk space,
- you have 20 seconds to abort hangup. If you still are online you will
- be asked to enter a new download directory, which can also be created
- here, then the transfer will be continued.
-
- Activity
-
- Will give you a moving bar when the transfer is in progress. In this
-
- - 63 -
-
- way you will know if your computer hangs.
-
- Path
-
- When you are receiving several files you can change the download path.
- When you change this path, then the next file(s) will be saved in
- the new directory.
-
- Hangup after
-
- Pressing H will toggle hangup after transfer. This can be used if
- you are leaving the house and have a big download or upload in progress.
- When the transfer is finished then a window will appear and you will
- have 10 seconds to abort the hangup.
-
- Skip rest of file
-
- When downloading several files with Zmodem, you can sometimes skip
- the current file and proceed with the next one. Not all Zmodem protocols
- will accept this skip command, so if it does not work you should
- abort the transfer and select the files again, without the unwanted file.
-
- RTS low while writing
-
- Request-to-send can be set low if your system gets to many CRC-errors.
- Setting this line low, means that the modem will not accept anything
- from the other modem, and it can then save without also having to
- receive bytes in the receive buffer at the same time.
-
- The Auto-RTS function in Terminate will allow you to setup how many
- errors you will accept before enabling. If triggered you will see the
- word 'AutoOn' instead of 'Off'. For more information look in the
- communications setup menu.
-
- Batch upload PgUp,Alt-B
-
- To prepare a list of files to upload before calling a system, use this
- function. Remember that it will only work with protocols like Zmodem
- that are capable of sending several files at the same time.
-
- The list of files to be uploaded will be stored in the utility directory
- as UPLOAD.TXT
-
- Commands
-
- Space Tag/untag file
- E Edit line manually
- Insert Insert line
- Delete Delete line
- F Filemanager selects a file and inserts name on this line
- Return Upload file under menubar
- U Upload all tagged files
- A Upload all files
- * Invert tags
- + Tag all
- - Untag all
-
-
- - 64 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Emulations ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- You will not need to know how an emulation works. Just think of it as a
- screen translator. The remote sends control codes that will be translated
- by Terminate and shown on screen. In this way it is possible to change the
- colours and move around the screen. The only thing you need to know is what
- emulation the remote supports. If you only call normal BBS systems you won't
- need to change anything here, since the default emulation is set to
- Avatar/ANSI. That means Terminate understands both ANSI and AVATAR codes. If
- systems you call ask if you want AVATAR codes, say yes - then screens will
- be updated 30-40% faster than using ANSI codes. Some BBS systems will use
- some VT-102 scrolling commands that are the same as the ANSI-music; that is
- why the ANSI-music must be turned off when using those systems.
-
- Terminate provides 16 Terminal slots and each of these slots can be setup to
- act in different ways.
-
- The Avatar/ANSI module Terminate uses, is made by Gregory P. Smith and is
- called Pavatar. The ANSI-music module is made by Bo Bendtsen and
- donated to Gregory.
-
- ╒════╡ Emulation setup ╞╕
- │ Default terminal │
- │ Setup terminal │
- │ Edit keyboard │
- ╘═══════════════════════╛
-
- Default terminal
-
- ╒═════════════╤══════════════════════════════╡ Change Terminal ╞╕
- │■Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/0* with ANSI-BBS fallback │
- │ Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/0* with ANSI-fallback │
- │ Avatar │ Avatar/0* without ANSI fallback │
- │ Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/1 with ANSI-BBS fallback │
- │ Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/1 with ANSI fallback │
- │ Avatar │ Avatar/1 without ANSI fallback │
- │ ANSI-BBS │ Only use ANSI for Bulletin Boards │
- │ ANSI/VT-100 │ Normal ANSI / VT-100 terminal │
- │ VT-52 │ Digital Equipment Corp. │
- │ VT-102 │ Enhanced VT-100 │
- │ VT-220 │ Not available yet │
- │ TTY │ Disable all emulations │
- │ Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/0* with ANSI-BBS fallback User 1 │
- │ Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/0* with ANSI-BBS fallback User 2 │
- │ Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/0* with ANSI-BBS fallback User 3 │
- │ Avatar/ANSI │ Avatar/0* with ANSI-BBS fallback User 4 │
- ╘═════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Which terminal slot should be default when starting up Terminate.
- Do not get confused about all the emulations, always use the first
- emulation if it works. Some Unix systems demand some special things so, if
- you call some old system that only uses 7E1 and it does not work, try using
- the ANSI/VT-100 emulation.
-
- Setup terminal
-
- - 65 -
-
-
- ╒═════════════════╤═══════════╡ Terminal setup 1 ╞╕
- │ Emulation │ Avatar/ANSI │
- │ Comment │ │
- │ Keyboard file │ AVATAR .KBD │
- │ Scroll screen │ Yes │
- │ Local echo │ No │
- │ Add linefeed │ No │
- │ Strip high │ No │
- │ Erase backspace │ Yes │
- │ Ignore null │ Yes │
- │ Statusline │ Yes │
- │ ANSI music │ Yes │
- ╘═════════════════╧═══════════════════════════════╛
-
- Emulation
-
- Which emulation should Terminate use for this slot. You must know which
- emulation the other end is using. If this is not possible, try all the
- emulations one by one and see if one of them works. Avatar is the
- fastest emulation because it is able to 'compress' the screen a
- little. Avatar with ANSI fallback means that Terminate first will
- assume Avatar screen codes, but also translate ANSI codes. In this
- way Terminate supports both Avatar and ANSI at the same time.
- That is useful because many RemoteAccess/SuperBBS systems first look
- for Avatar (.AVT) files and if they are not found then ANSI (.ANS) files.
-
- Comment
-
- A small comment that will be shown when you choose default Terminal
- and Terminal in the phonebook. If you have a terminal without the
- statusline enabled you could make a comment about it here.
-
- Keyboard file
-
- If you want a special keyboard file (.KBD) to be loaded when this
- terminal slot is selected. You can overwrite this in the phonebook
- by entering another keyboard mapping for that phonebook entry.
-
- Scroll screen
-
- Normally Terminate will scroll the screen down, but some systems will not
- need this, so you can just change this setting if you have problems.
-
- Local echo
-
- Toggles local echo. Local echo is sometimes also called DUPLEX.
- Local echo off = Full duplex
- Local echo on = Half duplex
- When local echo is on, the characters you type will echo on the screen. If
- you have a modem connected, you may then see the characters twice every
- time you press a key. You normally always use local echo off (Full duplex)
-
- Add linefeed
-
- When Terminate gets #13 it is interpreted as if Terminate had also
- received a linefeed.
-
- Strip high
-
-
- - 66 -
-
- Strip all characters above ASCII 127 on incoming traffic. Should not
- be used normally.
-
- Erase backspace
-
- When pressing backspace (ASCII 8) then if this option is On, the
- cursor will move 1 back and erase the character, Off will only
- move the cursor 1 back. Default is On.
-
- Ignore null
-
- If a system sends nulls (#0), Terminate ignore them when this is turned
- on. TTY and VT52 emulations ignore these.
-
- Statusline
-
- When using a terminal slot, you can choose to show the statusline on the
- screen. This is normally always turned on. With this option you can select
- a terminal slot for a phone entry that has the statusline turned off when
- you call that system.
-
- ANSI music
-
- Allow ANSI music when using this emulation. Note that VT-102 cannot
- use ANSI music because a scroll command ESC[M starts with the same
- code as ANSI music.
-
- Edit keyboard
-
- ┌────────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────
- │ │ F1 Sh-F1 C-F1 Bo Bendtse
- │ Keyboard mapping │ F2 Sh-F2 C-F2 Kastanie a
- │ │ F3 Sh-F3 C-F3 2620 Alber
- └────────────────────┤ F4 Sh-F4 C-F4 Danmark^M
- │ F5 Sh-F5 C-F5 ATM0
- Keypad * │ F6 Sh-F6 C-F6 ATM1
- Keypad - - │ F7 Sh-F7 C-F7 ATDT#43#
- Keypad + + │ F8 Sh-F8 C-F8 ATDT*43#
- Keypad . . │ F9 Sh-F9 C-F9 ATI4
- Keypad / / │ F10 Sh-F10 C-F10 AT&V
- Keypad<┘ │ F11 @DIAL 5 6 Sh-F11 C-F11 ATI6
- │ F12 Sh-F12 C-F12 AT$H
- ─────────────────────┼──────────────────────────────────────────────────────
- Tab │ Keypad 0 0 Grey CUp CurUp
- Sh-Tab │ Keypad 1 1 Grey CDn CurDn
- Insert │ Keypad 2 2 Grey CLf CurLf
- Delete │ Keypad 3 3 Grey CRt CurRt
- Bckspace │ Keypad 4 4 Grey Ins
- C-Home │ Keypad 5 5 Grey Del Home
- C-End │ Keypad 6 6 Grey Home End
- C-PgUp │ Keypad 7 7 Grey End
- C-PgDn │ Keypad 8 8 Grey PgUp Enter
- C-Bckspc │ Keypad 9 9 Grey PgDn
- Esc = Exit Enter = Edit Grey PgUp/PgDn=Up/Download if blank │ AVATAR.KBD
-
- Each keyboard file contains a complete set of codes that will be sent when
- you press the function or special keys on your keyboard. Different
- emulations need special characters to be sent when, for example, you press
- F1. You have 20 chars for each entry and 40 chars for the Ctrl-F1..Ctrl-F12
- keys.
-
- - 67 -
-
-
- C- = Ctrl Sh- = Shift
-
- As you can see in this AVATAR.KBD file, I have set up my name on Ctrl-F1.
- Then my name will be sent in terminal mode when I press Ctrl-F1. It's a good
- idea to insert your name, address, city, etc, here because most systems will
- ask you for this information and then you don't have to enter it manually
- over and over again.
-
- A special command is @DIAL, which you can insert anywhere. When you then
- press this key. Terminate will enter the phonebook, tag the entries and
- start dialing the numbers.
-
- @DIAL 5 6 7 8 9 10
-
- Will tag and then start dialing these entries. If you have a system you
- call very often, you can enter the entry number from the phonebook here
- and then you can call this system by pressing just one key. In the example
- F11 is used. Remember to turn on enhanced keyboard in toggles first or
- use other keys than F11 and F12.
-
- You should not change Grey PgUp/PgDn unless 100% necessary, because these
- keys are used for the upload and download menu.
-
- Another default setting only for Denmark is Ctrl-F7. This turns off
- something we call "knock on door". Which means that, on digital lines while
- we are talking to another person, we hear a beep when a 3rd person calls.
- Since this noise on the line might interfere, we turn it off. Ctrl-F8 turns
- it on again (at the phone company)
-
- If you need any special characters here, just press Alt-A while editing -
- then you can select from the ASCII selector. Terminate will understand both
- a #13 and '^M' as the same. The reason that ^M will be translated into a #13
- (return) when it is sent, is to remain compatible with old terminal programs
- that don't have an ASCII selector like Terminate and then it would be
- impossible to edit that character. The keyboard string and modem strings
- will understand the ^ parameter.
-
- ^@ = 0, ^A = 1, ^M = 13. It is because the ASCII value of a M is 77,
- from that is deducted 64 (77-64) equals 13.
-
-
- - 68 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Host mode ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ╒═══════════════╤══════════════════════════════════════════╡ Host settings ╞╕
- │ Host init │ ATS0=0^M │
- │ Open system │ No │
- │ Send path │ UPLOAD\ │
- │ Receive path │ DOWNLOAD\ │
- │ Shut down pwd │ ........ │
- │ Allow sound │ Yes │
- │ Ring count │ 1 │
- │ Callback wait │ 90 │
- │ Fax receive │ No │
- │ Fax init │ │
- │ Fax answer │ │
- │ Fax internal │ Yes │
- │ Fax command │ RCVFAX 2 /p:1 /r:0 /w:c:\terminat\fax │
- │ External 1 │ Doorway DOOR.BAT !P !B │
- │ External 2 │ Boot BOOT.COM │
- │ External 3 │ BiModem BIMODEM.COM │
- │ │ !P COM 1-8 !C=COM 0-7 !B Baud !0=Download-path │
- │ │ !M Swap memory first !W Wait for return after │
- ╘═══════════════╧═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Host init-string
-
- You must not setup the modem to answer the modem automatically. The S0
- register holds the number of rings before answering - this should be set to
- 0, then Terminate rather than the modem will answer for you.
- When Terminate gets the ring-string (RING), the answer-string (ATA) will be
- sent and Terminate waits for a carrier.
-
- Open system
-
- If the system is closed then only users defined in your setup will be
- allowed to logon. If you have an open system, all users that call will be
- able to log on - but only with normal user status and only able to up or
- download with specified directories. If a supervisor logs on, complete
- access will be granted whether the system is open or closed.
-
- Send path
-
- Users that are not supervisors are only allowed to download from this
- directory.
-
- Receive path
-
- Users that are not supervisors are only allowed to upload to this
- directory.
-
- Shut down pwd
-
- If a supervisor logs on, the supervisor can shut down Terminate and exit
- to DOS, so no one can call the hostmode again.
-
- Allow sound
-
- - 69 -
-
-
- Make sounds when users disconnects, etc. You can still define the global
- time period, but to be sure never to make any sound here, turn it off.
-
- Ring count
-
- How many rings before answering, if you enter a 0 here then the phone
- will never be answered.
-
- Callback wait
-
- To prevent someone from breaking your callback security.
- Waiting 90 seconds is normally the maximum time the phone company will
- hold the line if one of the parties hung up. Normally you would only
- use this function if you have really important information on your
- machine and want to be sure noone guesses your password.
- The callback function will most likely be used by you, if you have a
- computer at work and are working from home.
-
- Fax receive
-
- Enable reception of faxes if you have an adaptive answer faxmodem.
-
- If this is enabled, Terminate will first check if it has received one
- of the default fax answer strings (+FCON, CED, FAX) and then also check
- the customised fax answer string that has been entered in the
- 'fax answer field' if any.
-
- Adaptive answer:
-
- If your modem does not support adaptive answer, then you cannot accept
- both incoming faxes and data calls on the same line at the same time.
- To test if your modem support adaptive answer, enter in terminal mode:
-
- AT+FAE=1 + Enter (Class 1)
- AT+FAA=1 + Enter (Class 2)
-
- If your modem says ERROR or something other than OK, then your modem
- does not support adaptive answer. However, some modems have other ways
- of enabling this feature. In this case you will need to have a special
- fax initialisation string.
-
- Fax init
-
- Extra string to send to modem, to enable special features like other
- adaptive answer commands.
-
- Fax answer
-
- If your faxmodem responds with a string other than FAX, +FCON or CED,
- you must insert this different response in this field.
- Note: As long as 'FAX' is contained in the response string this will
- also work for example: 'CONNECT FAX'.
-
- Fax internal
-
- Use the internal fax receive in Terminate. Terminate can print out the
- pages if you enable the auto print in the fax configuration.
-
- Fax command
-
- - 70 -
-
-
- The default is a fax program for ZyXEL modems, but there are other similar
- programs that can be called to receive a fax.
-
- External 1 External 2 External 3
-
- Here you can define what external programs supervisors can call from
- hostmode while logged on. You can setup any program you like and use all
- the parameters you can see in the menu.
-
- Using the hostmode
-
- The hostmode in Terminate is fully built-in, so you will not have to
- setup anything at all. Just define the password for a user and you are
- ready to go.
-
- Terminate Host Mode 17.21 (Mon) 21-Feb-1994
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
- ▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒
- ▒╒═══════════════════╡ Status ╞╕▒▒▒╒════════════════════════════╡ System ╞╕▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Environment : AT BIOS (80486) │▒
- ▒│ Waiting for a call │▒▒▒│ Comm. : COM2,19200 8N1 │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Last caller : │▒
- ▒╘═════════════════════════════╛▒▒▒│ Open system : Yes │▒
- ▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒│ Messages : No │▒
- ▒╒════════════════════╡ Modem ╞╕▒▒▒│ Fax Receive : No │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Status Call Username │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Supervisor No Bo Bendtsen │▒
- ▒│ ATS0=0 │▒▒▒│ Normal No Guest │▒
- ▒│ OK │▒▒▒│ Normal No Terminat │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Normal No │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Normal No │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Normal No │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Normal No │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Normal No │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Normal No │▒
- ▒│ │▒▒▒│ Normal No │▒
- ▒╘═════════════════════════════╛▒▒▒╘══════════════════════════════════════╛▒
- ▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒▒
- ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
- Esc-Exit L-Logon E-Edit messages O-Open system Alt-J DOS
-
- Esc
-
- Exit the hostmode
-
- L
-
- Login locally to the hostmode - you should only need this when testing
- hostmode.
-
- E
-
- If someone has written a note to you, you will be able to edit and
- delete messages.
-
- O
-
- Toggle open system, look above for more info.
-
-
- - 71 -
-
- Logging in to the host mode
-
- Terminate will first detect if the other end supports ANSI.
- If detected, Terminate will show menus that end with .ANS. If that
- file is not found or ANSI is not detected then .ASC files will be used.
-
- First the WELCOME.ANS/ASC will be shown, then you will be asked for a name
- and password. If callback is enabled, then Terminate will hangup the line
- and callback to the number specified in the user record. The user will
- then be asked the same password again and the session will continue in
- the normal way.
-
- The hostmode has two level. You are either a Supervisor or a normal user.
- A Supervisor will view the menu called SUPERVIS.ANS/ASC.
- A Normal user will view the menu called NORMAL.ANS/ASC.
- View the ANSI files 'TYPE UTILS\SUPERVIS.ANS' from DOS.
- You must use an ANSI editor to edit .ANS files.
-
- The commands:
-
- Alt-H Hangup
-
- Will hangup and return to host menu. Local only.
-
- Alt-Y Yell
-
- Start the fullscreen chatter. Local only.
-
- Alt-J DOS
-
- Jump to DOS. Local only.
-
- (C)hat
-
- Allows users to page you, the SysOp. Alt-Y will start chat.
-
- (D)ownload
-
- Download files, from current directory.
- Only internal protocols that are available can be selected by the users.
- Zmodem cannot be turned off.
-
- (E)rase
-
- Delete file in current directory.
-
- (F)iles
-
- Show files in current directory. If a FILES.BBS is present you will
- be asked if you want to show that instead, just like BBS systems.
-
- (G)oodbye
-
- Logoff system.
-
- (H)D-free
-
- Show how much free space on current drive.
-
- (I)nfo-HD
-
- - 72 -
-
-
- Information on all drives available in your system.
-
- (L)ocate
-
- Filefinder, allows you to search a drive for specific files. You are
- allowed to use wildcards (?,*).
-
- (M)essage
-
- Write message to you, the SysOp
-
- (N)ew dir
-
- Change to other directory.
-
- (R)ead
-
- Read messages written by other users.
-
- (S)hutdown
-
- Shut down Terminate and exit to DOS.
-
- (T)ype
-
- Type a textfile on screen.
-
- (U)pload
-
- Upload files into upload directory. Supervisors are asked to choose between
- the default upload directory or current directory.
-
- (1),(2),(3)
-
- Calls the external utilities, look in setup for information.
-
-
- - 73 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Auto login ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ╒════════════════╡ Login strings/scripts ╞╕
- │ Script delay │ 40 │
- │ Login timeout │ 60 │
- │ Strings │ │
- │ Mini Scripts │ │
- ╘════════════════╧════════════════════════╛
-
- Script delay
-
- How long to wait after connection before starting the login script.
- Some modems have a long response time, but you can set it to a lower
- value if your modem is ready right after connect.
-
- Login timeout
-
- If no auto login has been attemped in x seconds then all checking will be
- turned off. Checking all the strings can take up some time if you have a
- slow computer. You can always turn off auto login, by pressing Alt-Q.
-
- Login strings
-
- ╒════╤════════════════════════════════════════════════════╡ Login strings ╞╕
- │ │ Incoming name questions Incoming password questions │
- │ 1 │ PLEASE ENTER YOUR FULL NAME PASSWORD │
- │ 2 │ WHAT IS YOUR NAME KODEORD │
- │ 3 │ WHAT IS YOUR FIRST AND LAST NAME │
- │ 4 │ WHAT IS YOUR FIRST NAME │
- │ 5 │ ENTER YOUR FIRST AND LAST NAME │
- │ 6 │ YOUR NAME │
- │ 7 │ ENTER YOUR FULL NAME │
- │ 8 │ USERNAME │
- │ 9 │ NAME : │
- │ 10 │ HVAD HEDDER DU │
- ╘════╧═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Enter up to 20 questions - that could be a name question or a password
- question. When you define these strings you will not need a separate script
- for every system, Terminate will test all strings for a match.
- In this way you will be pretty sure to always match a string when logging
- in to any system. The password questions don't depend which name question
- is used - all password questions will also be checked.
-
- - 74 -
-
-
- Mini Scripts
-
- ╒══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╡ Mini Scripts ╞╕
- │ Login type Login script │
- │ Escapes, Name, Password !E!W!N!P │
- │ Escapes, Name, Y, Password !E!W!NY!13!P │
- │ Escapes, Name, J, Password !E!W!NJ!13!P │
- │ Escapes, First, Last name, Password !E!W!F!L!P │
- │ Escapes, IEMSI !E │
- │ Name, Password !W!N!P │
- │ Name, Y, Password !W!NY!13!P │
- │ Name, J, Password !W!NJ!13!P │
- │ First name, Last name, Password !W!F!L!P │
- │ Disable autologin and IEMSI !I │
- │ 1 Escape, Name, Password !27!W!N!P │
- ├──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ !Dx Delay x seconds !E Send escapes !W Wait for name question │
- │ !N Send full name !F Send First name !L Send Last name │
- │ !P Wait/Send password !I IEMSI off !num (0-255, !13=Return) │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Enter up to 16 mini login scripts.
- Lets explain an example: !E!W!F!L!P
- First use the auto escape procedure. !W then waits for one of the name
- questions to arrive, then firstname+return and lastname+return is sent.
- The !P will then wait for any of the password questions and send the
- password when the question arrives. Most scripts for normal BBS systems are
- already defined, so you should only need to choose which script the system
- will need. The login procedure runs in the background so all other features
- are available while trying to auto login.
-
-
-
- - 75 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Users / IEMSI setup ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- There are 10 different user profiles that can be used in 3 ways:
-
- When calling systems with the autodialer
- When calling systems with the pointsystem
- Setting up users for the hostmode
-
- ╒═══════════╤════════════════════════════════╡ Users/IEMSI ╞╕
- │ │ │
- │ User 1 │■ Bo Bendtsen │
- │ User 2 │ Guest │
- │ User 3 │ Terminat │
- │ User 4 │ │
- │ User 5 │ │
- │ User 6 │ │
- │ User 7 │ │
- │ User 8 │ │
- │ User 9 │ │
- │ User 10 │ │
- │ │ │
- │ IEMSI │ On │
- │ Info time │ 10 │
- │ Location │ London, United Kingdom │
- │ Phone # │ 42643827 │
- │ Prg. Pwd │ Off │
- │ Birthday │ 02-Apr-1965 29 years old (10818 days) │
- │ Security │ │
- │ │ ■ Active user │
- ╘═══════════╧═══════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Edit user profiles
-
- ╒═══════════╤═══════════════╤════════════════════════╡ User profile ╞╕
- │ │ Username │ Bo Bendtsen │
- │ User 1 │ Password │ ...... │
- │ User 2 │ Prg/host Pwd │ │
- │ User 3 │ Address │ 2:231/111.9999 │
- │ User 4 │ Comment │ │
- │ User 5 │ Host settings │ │
- │ User 6 ├───────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ User 7 │ IEMSI Profile (Interactive Elec. Mail Standard Id.) │
- │ User 8 ├───────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ User 9 │ Handle │ │
- │ User 10 │ Zmodem 8k │ Yes │
- │ │ Hot-keys │ Yes │
- │ IEMSI │ Quiet │ No │
- │ Info time │ Pausing │ Yes │
- │ Location │ Editor │ Yes │
- │ Phone # │ News │ Yes │
- │ Prg. Pwd │ New mail │ Yes │
- │ │ New files │ No │
- │ │ Screen Clr │ Yes │
- │ │ Auto chat │ Yes │
- ╘═══════════╧═══════════════╧════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- - 76 -
-
-
- Username
-
- The name of the user to use at logins and to show in the mail session,
- and for a user calling Terminate in hostmode.
-
- Password
-
- Default password to send if no password is defined in the phonebook. Maybe
- you have a lot of places where you use the same password. You may think it
- does not matter, but you will never be sure who uses or abuses your user
- record in other places. If you use random passwords it is almost guaranteed
- that only you, and the persons that have access directly to the hardware
- will know your password, but ONLY ON THAT SYSTEM. If you use the same
- password all over, maybe a person that is angry with you could use it
- to call up and write angry letters to the sysop in your name.
-
- Prg/host Pwd
-
- Program password can be asked when starting up Terminate to ensure that
- only you and nobody else uses your machine while you are gone for lunch.
- This password is also used when this person logs into the hostmode.
- Smart people could look inside TERMINAT.CFG so it is advised to also set
- encryption on phonebooks and the configuration file.
-
- Address
-
- The mailer address is explained in point setup - it is used together with
- the mailer system. Remember the address for user 1 is your MAIN ADDRESS
-
- Comment
-
- Any comment you want to remember about this user.
-
- Host settings
-
- ╒════════════════╤═══════════════╡ Host settings ╞╕
- │ Access │ Supervisor │
- │ Callback │ No │
- │ Dial prefix │ ATDT │
- │ Phone number │ │
- ╘════════════════╧════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Access
-
- Either Supervisor or normal. A supervisor has complete access to your
- computer. A normal user only has limited access. More info in hostmode.
- For security reasons a Supervisor must always have a password defined.
- If there is no password defined in Prg/host Pwd the Supervisor
- option cannot be turned on.
-
- Callback
-
- When a user has callback enabled, Terminate will hangup the line
- and call back the user. If you choose Ask, Terminate will ask online
- which number to call and dial that number.
-
- Dial prefix
-
- What prefix to use with this callback record
-
- - 77 -
-
-
- Phone number
-
- The number to callback
-
- User IEMSI settings
-
- When you call a system that supports IEMSI logins, you can set these
- parameters before calling the system:
-
- Handle Also known as alias
- Zmodem 8k When logging on with IEMSI and this function is enabled
- then a 'ZAP' flag will also be presented in protocol flags,
- 'ZAP,ZMO,KER' without this enabled only 'ZMO,KER'.
- When receiving the server package Terminate will test for
- the 'ZAP' flag in capabilities and then enable the
- ZedZap (Zmodem 8k) protocol instead of the normal Zmodem.
- At the present time only RemoteAccess 2.00 (release ver.)
- will support this. Then when autodownloading ZedZap will be
- selected. When uploading Terminate will place the menubar
- on ZedZap to inform you that this protocol is needed.
- Hot-keys Use hotkey on the system
- Quiet Turn on/off online messages from other users
- Pausing Turn the MORE Yes/no etc. prompts on/off
- Editor Use fullscreen editor
- News Watch the NEWS bulletins at login
- New mail Search for new mail at login
- New files Search for new files at login
- Screen Clr Allow system to send screen clears
- Auto chat Allow the fullscreen chatter to be used automatically
-
- IEMSI
-
- Allow Terminate to try logging on with IEMSI. You can also use a login
- script with the !I parameter if you do not want to globally turn off
- IEMSI logins.
-
- Info time
-
- When a IEMSI connection results, how long you want the information to be
- shown on screen in 1/10 seconds. You can always recall the window by
- pressing Alt-F4.
-
- Location
-
- Your city and country. This will be transferred in the IEMSI and
- EMSI (mail) sessions.
-
- Phone #
-
- Your phone number can also be transfered in IEMSI and EMSI sessions.
-
- Prg. Pwd (Program password)
-
- Ask for password when starting Terminate. All 10 Prg.Pwd can be used. If
- you forget your password and have set encryption on configuration and
- phonebooks, just delete the configuration file, then the phonebooks will be
- decrypted.
-
- Birthday
-
- - 78 -
-
-
- On many systems that you call for the first time, you will be asked for
- your birth date. This is done for several reasons: to see how old you
- are; to be able of sending you a birthday note or to check if you really
- who you say you are and not someone who has stolen someone else's
- account. Soon, when you log into a new system Terminate will send the
- birthday, so you don't have to type it in yourself everytime you log into
- a new system for the first time.
-
- Please note that this is only supported by a few systems like RemoteAccess.
-
- Security
-
- Prevent unauthorised users (particularly in corporate and network
- environments) from tampering with approved settings or using
- unauthorised 'phonebooks.
-
- ╒═══════════════════╤═══════════╡ Security ╞╕
- │ Configuration │ │
- │ Phonebook │ │
- │ Point system │ │
- │ File manager │ │
- │ Screen blanker │ │
- │ Security menu │ │
- │ System Searcher │ │
- │ Encrypt logfile │ │
- │ Network lock │ │
- ╘═══════════════════╧═══════════════════════╛
-
- Configuration
-
- If you enter a password here, then all users will be prompted
- for this password whenever they press Alt-O. Remember that if
- YOU forget this password your entire setup will be lost. You
- must enter a password HERE if you want to protect the following
- menus:
-
- Phonebook
-
- Whenever the user wants to use a new phonebook or change anything in
- an existing phonebook this password must be entered.
-
- Point system
-
- When pressing Alt-F7 to enter the point system, this password must be
- known by the user.
-
- File manager
-
- When pressing Alt-F to enter the file manager, this password must be
- known by the user.
-
- Screen blanker
-
- If the screen blanker activates, this password must be entered to
- defeat it - for example if you leave your machine for an
- unexpectedly long period.
-
- System Searcher
-
-
- - 79 -
-
- Protect the Alt-F8 menu with an extra password
-
- Security menu
-
- If you want users to have access to the configuration, but not to this
- menu, just enter any password here.
-
- - 80 -
-
-
- Encrypt logfile
-
- ╒════════════════════════╤═════════════════════════╡ Encrypted logfile ╞╕
- │ Secondary logfile │ F:\SYSTEM\LOGFILES\T-USER%NET%.LOG │
- │ Password │ SECRET │
- │ Decrypt/View logfile │ │
- ╘════════════════════════╧══════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Secondary logfile
-
- If you want to keep an extra logfile of the users activity, you can
- enter the filename in here. If you are on a network like Novell, then
- the user should only have Create/Write access to this directory where
- your extra logfiles are located. When you are using a network with
- several users, you should always have an environment variable for each
- machine with a number like: SET NET=07. This would create a file called
- T-USER07.LOG in F:\SYSTEM\LOGFILES.
-
- Password
-
- If you also want to encrypt this secondary logfile, you can enter
- a password here.
-
- Decrypt/View logfile
-
- This extra logfile is written in a database format. If it is encrypted
- the only way to view it is from this menu. Remember to protect at least
- the Security Menu with a password as well.
-
- Network lock
-
- ╒══════╤═════════════════════════════════════════════╡ Network lock ╞╕
- │ Lock │ │
- │ EXE │ \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TERMINAT.EXE │
- │ KEY │ \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TERMINAT.KEY │
- │ CFG │ \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TERMINAT.CFG │
- ╘══════╧═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Lock
-
- Lock TERMINAT.EXE so it only can be started from a path that you define.
- This is very useful so users cannot move the Terminate files to a local
- drive and change the configuration.
-
- EXE
-
- Complete path (or network-path) and filename to TERMINAT.EXE.
-
- KEY
-
- Complete path (or network-path) and filename to TERMINAT.KEY.
- With this function you can hide the keyfile anywhere on the network.
- It is suggested that you rename TERMINAT.KEY to a random filename,
- like 'ABCDEFGH.IJK' or simular. Then place this file on a network
- path where the users only have READ access to.
-
- CFG
-
- Only allow this configuration file to be used with Terminate.
-
- - 81 -
-
- If you just want to lock the EXE and KEY, just leave this field
- blank then you still are allowed to use the /C: on the commandline.
- You can also use environment variabels:
-
- SET TERCFG=0001
- \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TER-%TERCFG%.CFG
- Would be expanded to
- \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TER-0001.CFG
-
- SET TCONFIG=0050
- F:\TERMINAT\TER-%TCONFIG%.CFG
- Would be expanded to
- F:\TERMINAT\TER-0050.CFG
-
-
- - 82 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ The Pointsystem ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- -=> T H E P O I N T S Y S T E M <=-
-
- The EMSI point system is designed mainly for points in fidonet or other
- similar networks. It can also be used by companies that have a mailer
- program running such as Frontdoor, Portal of Power, d'Bridge or Binkley
- >2.50. It now also supports the old standard called YooHoo/2U2.
- With this system you can, as a point, totally throw away a frontdoor if
- you are not using another maileditor. As a default it is set up with GECHO
- and runs in what people call Binkley style. If you are using Frontdoor/Gecho
- and want to change to Terminate/Gecho, you only need to change Gecho from
- running in Frontdoor mode to Binkley mode. If you are using Binkley or
- Portal of Power you can run directly with the same directories.
-
- With a mail system you can send and receive packed messages and files
- without getting online to a BBS system. The only demand is that the system
- you are calling runs EMSI (Electronic Mail Standard Identification). When
- using the mail system in Terminate you can throw away your fossil driver
- (serial device driver) and your nodelist compiler.
-
- Terminate can use direct port access and read the uncompiled nodelists with
- large buffers. Maybe this is a little slower than searching a compiled
- nodelist BUT normal points normally only call their BOSS (uplink) and get
- their mail and files from there. With Terminate you will not have to find
- and setup nodelist compilers and this will save a lot of hard disk space.
- Fidonet, which we are a part of, is the biggest private network in the
- whole world. It has thousands and thousands of computers connected
- throughout the entire world. To understand this system you must understand
- what a node number looks like. This number is an identification number -
- so if anyone sends you a message from anywhere in the world. The message
- will be 'routed' through some other systems before reaching the
- destination. The best part is that you only call your BOSS and send the
- message - the rest will be taken care of by the network, so you save the
- phonebill by not calling long distances. The only thing it costs you is
- the call to your BOSS, which is normally located in your own city or
- country. You will also be able to participate in conferences where all
- messages are public. But you will learn all this if you make contact with
- a Fidonet sysop near you. BBS's belonging to a network will often have a
- mailer program answer the phone and decide if the caller is another mailer
- or a 'human' caller. That is why you have to press ESCAPE and then the
- system says something like: 'Loading BBS, please wait'. If you are calling
- with the point system you will be recognized as a mailer, and a mail-
- session will be started.
-
- Mail session
- ────────────
- You dial up and connect
- The point system tries to handshake (establish EMSI session)
- Terminate sends all mail-packets/files to system with Zmodem
- Goes into receive mode and receives mail/files/requested files for you
- The other end terminates the call, (Terminate will also hangup)
-
- The best thing about running this mail system, is that you will start
- transferring files immediately you have been connected and will not have to
-
- - 83 -
-
- log on manually and type anything - everything is fully automatic. Most
- points in fidonet are users that have had modems for a while and have
- problems paying their phonebill, because they were hanging online on systems
- quite a lot. Now they can save money because REQUESTING files is much
- faster and the requests will not appear on their user account under
- downloads. At our system we allow all points in fidonet to request, but
- some places you will not be allowed to do this. To understand how the
- system works you need to understand what a nodenumber looks like.
- The syntax for a nodenumber in fidonet is Zone:Net/Node.Point.
-
- Zone 1 = USA / Canada
- 2 = Europe / Commonwealth of Independent States
- 3 = Australia / New Zealand
- 4 = Latin America
- 5 = Africa
- 6 = Asia
-
- Many other networks are also using Fidonet Technology and
- uses normally higher zone numbers.
-
- Net The network you are a part of
- Node The node (BOSS) you belong to
- Point Your point number at the node
-
- Our nodenumber is 2:236/111.0 (or short 2:236/111). A node is a computer
- that is always available in zone mail hour, at least. This is a time,
- usually at night, depending on where you are in the world, where you always
- can expect to reach the node. Most nodes are also BBS systems where normal
- users can access conferences and write messages to users on other boards,
- sometimes in other parts of the world. A node will always have point number
- .0 . The first point a sysop gets will be .1. Our first point is
- 2:236/111.1. The SysOp decides for himself the point numbers.
- For each user profile in the setup you can define a nodenumber. Don't get
- confused about all the different expressions. To test the system, edit user
- profile 1 (with your name) and enter 2:236/111.9999 as a test number. You
- are hereby allowed to use that number for test reasons only, please do not
- abuse the number. Then setup the point system described later and try to
- call our system at 2:236/111.
-
- There are plenty of new words to learn in this world!
-
- Poll
-
- Poll simply means calling a mail system
-
- Request
-
- When you request a file from a BBS system, you must know the filename in
- advance. There is something called MAGIC filenames, that refers to
- filename alias's. For example, if you request FILES from any system the
- system should send the entire BBS filelist. Another known alias is ABOUT
- which will send you a small description of the BBS. If you want the latest
- Terminate, you can just request TERMINAT from our number. You can also
- request files from all the areas on a BBS where the SysOp has allowed
- file requests. If you want the filelist from DAN BBS, you could either
- request FILES or DANBBS.ARJ.
-
- Netmail
-
- A netmail is a private message that is only destined for one person.
-
- - 84 -
-
- The message can be routed through the network but also sent directly. All
- the SysOps will be able to see your message if you route it through the
- network, but you can also send the message CRASH which means you dial
- directly to the system to which the message is addressed.
- You are not able to send messages directly to other points of course,
- because they do not have mailers running, but if you want to send to
- another point, you can call the point's BOSS and then the message will be
- directed to the point (then the SysOp on that board can read your message.)
- You can only send crashmail to systems which have a CM flag in the nodelist
- you are using. The CM flag means that the system can accept crashmail 24
- hours a day, that means the phoneline is used only for the computer.
-
- Echomail
-
- Echomail messages are messages written in a conference. There is a
- public conference called TERMINATE, in both Fido and EuroLink, where
- everyone is encouraged to contribute.
- When you write a message in such a conference the message can be read by
- anyone that has access to that conference. Every conference has a set of
- rules that must be followed and which normally are administered by the
- conference moderator.
-
- Hold
-
- When things are on hold it means that they are waiting to be picked
- up. Your BOSS will always place your mail on hold, so you will get it
- the next time you poll.
-
- Snailmail
-
- A term used for the normal letters you put in the mailbox. Using a mail
- system is faster and more convenient for a SysOp than using a fax machine.
- If you want to send a message to any member of the fido network, you can
- write the message with crash status, press a button and 1 minute later the
- guy anywhere in the world has your message. This kind of electronic mail
- system will take over almost everywhere in the next few years. Nothing else
- will be faster and why use fax paper when you can do it this way?
-
- - 85 -
-
-
- Alt-O,N
-
- ╒═══════════════╤═════════════════════════════════════════╡ Point system ╞╕
- │ Main address │ 2:236/111.9999 │
- │ Boss setup │ │
- │ Descriptions │ Yes │
- │ Redial tries │ 3 │
- │ Dial prefix │ ATDT │
- │ Allow ZedZap │ No │
- │ Ask device │ No │
- │ Pop Simulate │ No │
- │ Zone match │ Yes │
- │ Handshake │ Auto │
- │ Inbound │ I:\ │
- │ Outbound │ OUT\ZONE\ │
- │ Nodelist 1 │ UTILS\NODELIST.* │
- │ Nodelist 2 │ C:\NODELIST\NODELIST.* │
- │ Nodelist 3 │ │
- │ Password file │ PASSWORD.TXT │
- │ Phone convert │ │
- │ Modem strings │ │
- │ Mail editor │ MAILEDIT.BAT │
- │ Import │ GECHO TOSS │
- │ Export │ GECHO SCAN PACK │
- │ After mail │ │
- ╘═══════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Main address
-
- For each user profile you can define a network address (nodenumber/
- pointnumber). Choose which address will be your main address when calling
- other systems. The test number which you are allowed to use is
- 2:236/111.9999 - that means you are point number 9999 of DAN BBS.
-
- Boss setup
-
- Terminate will allow you to use 8 different systems. So here you can
- set up each phone number and other options.
-
- Dial
-
- If you call Terminate from the command line with /BOSS or /BOSS:0
- Terminate will either call every Boss specified in the Point System
- setup or call the marked systems until you get a connection, depending
- on what you have selected here. The "dial until connect" option is
- useful if you have a Boss that has different numbers and you just want
- to connect to one of these numbers in case the other numbers are busy.
-
- ╒═══════════════╤═══════════════════╡ Boss setup ╞╕
- │ Boss phone │ 43623990 │
- │ Boss Device │ COM1 2400 8N1 │
- │ Boss prefix │ ATDT │
- │ Boss password │ │
- │ Boss synch │ Yes │
- │ Boss autodial │ Yes │
- ╘═══════════════╧═════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Boss phone
-
-
- - 86 -
-
- Terminate does not need to know the nodenumber of your BOSS, you can call
- to any system, then the outbound directory will be checked and any file
- that has the same nodenumber as the called system, will be sent.
-
- Boss device
-
- Which device to use for dialing this Boss.
-
- Boss prefix
-
- Which string to send to the modem before dialling. This works just as in
- the phonebook.
-
- Boss password
-
- Force a password especially for this system, to make sure that you have
- actually got the right system. If the password does not match on both
- sides the called system will hang up. When calling a Boss, the
- password file will not be used and you MUST specify the password you
- use in this menu.
-
- Boss synch
-
- When using the Call Boss function your computer's time/date will be
- synchronized to the same as the Boss's computer. In this way you can
- always be sure your watch is correct if you have an unstable clock. If
- your Boss has an unstable clock you should turn this off.
-
- Boss autodial
-
- When choosing autodial, Terminate will call this Boss and all other
- Boss's that have autodial enabled. Works only when 2 or more are defined.
-
- Descriptions
-
- When you send files within the point system and this toggle is on, then
- Terminate will look in the same directory for a FILES.BBS/DESCRIPT.ION
- style files. These files contain descriptions of the files. Terminate
- will grab the descriptions and create a file called NNNNnnnn.BBS where
- NNNN is the netnumber in hex and nnnn is the nodenumber in hex.
- (00EC006F.BBS). This file will be transfered after all the other files.
-
- Redial tries
-
- How many times to try connecting, Terminate will wait `pause' seconds
- between each call (modem and dailing). Enter a 0 to keep on dialing until
- connect.
-
- Dial prefix
-
- Which prefix to use when dialling systems in nodelist or manually.
-
- Allow ZedZap
-
- Use Zmodem 8k for transfering the mail, if you have any trouble with
- bad lines, you should not turn this on. Turning ZedZap on will increase
- the CPS a little.
-
- Ask device
-
-
- - 87 -
-
- When calling any system, then ask which device to use. Will be used when
- you dial from outbound, nodelist or manually.
-
- Pop Simulate
-
- Some people do not like points or other people to filerequest with
- Terminate, because it is so easy to setup. They might have a program
- that will test this. So if you are denied filerequest simply because
- you are using Terminate, enabling this will make the other end think
- that you are calling with a popular mailer called Portal of Power.
-
- Zone match
-
- Yes: Compare the Zone number. No : Don't compare the Zone number.
- Since the chance of getting a call from another person with the same
- nodenumber is practically zero, you should always set this to No,
- so if the zonenumber is wrong (0:236/111) the transfer will continue
- anyway.
-
- Handshake
-
- With a mailer you can use either EMSI or Yoohoo/2U2, with this option
- you can force which mail-handshake to use.
-
- Inbound
-
- The directory where incoming files will be stored
-
- Outbound
-
- The directory where outgoing files/packets/mail files will be stored.
- If you have mail for other zones they will be stored in a directory
- called the old plus the zone in hex. OUT\ZONE -=> OUT\ZONE.016 for
- zone 27 (16 hex = 27 dec). Terminate will delete empty directories.
-
- Nodelist 1 Nodelist 2 Nodelist 3
-
- A nodelist in fidonet is usually called NODELIST.xxx. The xxx is the day
- number of the release. The nodelist is compiled every week by leading
- members of fidonet who also provide NODEDIFF files, which contain changes
- in the nodelist for last week. The current nodelist is (was) NODELIST.092.
- When you specify a filename called C:\NODELIST\NODELIST.* then the nodelist
- with the highest day number will be used. If you have a NODELIST.085 and a
- NODELIST.092 then .092 will be used. You should place a small nodelist
- first with important numbers of people so they will be found very quickly.
- When calling a number first the nodelist 1 will be searched, then
- nodelist 2, then nodelist 3.
-
- Password file
-
- A file that will be used when dialling systems in the nodelist.
- The syntax is simple:
- Nodenumber Password PktPassword on each line
- 2:236/111 hello PKTsafe
- That would tell you that you have talked with 2:236/111 and agreed on
- a password to use at both places. If no PKT password will be inserted
- directly in the netmail.
-
- Phone convert
-
-
- - 88 -
-
- ┌──────────────────┤ Phone convert ├┐
- │ Strip Add before │
- │ 1 39- 0 │
- │ 2 │
- │ 3 │
- │ 4 │
- │ 5 │
- └───────────────────────────────────┘
-
- In fidonet nodelists, there is a country prefix on all phone numbers. When
- you call a system in your country you must first remove that information.
- The international prefix for Danish nodes is 45- so we have to remove the
- 45- from the phone numbers before dialling. This should already be set up
- as the default if you had COUNTRY.SYS installed the first time you ran
- Terminate, so 45-43623990 will be converted into 43623990.
- You can then also add extra information when stripping. This will only be
- added before the number if the strip string was found. In Italy they need
- first to strip 39- then put a 0 in front of the phone numbers.
- 39-10-3770080 will be converted into 010-3770080. In some places you also
- need to strip your city code. Remember that 39-10 must be before 39-
- otherwise only 39- will be stripped. Remember when calling another country
- the international dial prefix will be used.
-
- Modem strings
-
- ┌──┤ Nodelist flags/strings ├┐
- │ Flag String to send │
- │ V32 ATB0^M │
- │ HST ATB1^M │
- │ V32B ATB0^M │
- └────────────────────────────┘
-
- When dialling a number from the nodelist, you can tell Terminate to send
- special strings to your modem, depending which flags there are in the
- nodelist. Flags in the nodelists are used for giving you information on
- the system you are about to call. It will tell you which modem or modem
- standards the system is using and allow you to configure your own modem
- before dialling. The example is for a USRobotics Dual Standard modems.
-
- Mail editor
-
- Setup which program you want to call when pressing Mail editor in the
- point system. You could send any command and parameters here.
-
- Import
-
- Which program and parameters to call when you have received mail and
- want to import it into your mailsystem.
-
- Export
-
- When you have written some mail and want to export the mail from your mail
- system and make it ready to be sent to your BOSS or another system.
-
- After mail
-
- When you receive files or mail with the point system, you can call
- any external program or batchfile.
-
- - 89 -
-
-
- Alt-F7 Using the point system
-
- ╒═══════════════╤═════╤╡ Outbound 2:236/111 ╞══════════════╡ Point system ╞╕
- │ Call Boss │ │ Node Files Size Flags │
- │ Call system │ │ 2:236/3 1 208 ··C···· │
- │ Send files │ │ 2:236/111 8 97 ·R····· │
- │ File requests │ │ 2:236/111 1 302 ··C···M │
- │ Kill mail │ │ │
- │ Auto request │ │ │
- │ Pick up mail │ Yes │ │
- │ Send AKA's │ Yes │ │
- │ Zoom mail │ │ │
- │ Main address │ │ │
- │ Send message │ │ │
- │ Change mail │ │ │
- │ Mail editor │ │ │
- │ Import │ │ │
- │ Export │ │ │
- ├───────────────┴─────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- ╘═╡ V View logfile ╞═════════════════════════╡ (A)dd time, Timeout in ╞╛
-
- To start up directly in this menu: TERMINAT /POINT
-
- The outbound window
-
- In the outbound window you will be able to see all packets/files/messages
- that are waiting to be sent. First the nodenumber that shows which node the
- files are intended for. Then how many files you are going to send or how
- many you have requested, the size of the files and some status flags that
- will show what kind and what do to with the package.
-
- Status flags used in other mailers (?UT = Netmail, ?LO flow files)
-
- I Immediate flag, force a mailer to start dialling at once and keep
- on dialling until the package is delivered. (.ILO .IUT)
- C Crash is almost the same as the Immediate flag, but it will not
- be sent as fast as Immediate. (.CLO .CUT)
- H Files are on hold, that means they will not be sent from your
- system. (.HLO .HUT).
- F A normal package able to be routed. (.FLO .FUT)
- D A direct package which cannot be routed (.DLO .DUT)
- R The package is a filerequest (.REQ)
- M Unpacked netmail
-
- Since you are a point and nobody will call you and you will always call out,
- there are a lot of flags that you will never need. Terminate will send all
- files to the system you have called no matter what flag it has, except for
- files with the Hold flag. Do not get confused about these flags, just
- think: If the file is not on hold, it will be sent.
- The filename of a package determines it's destination. A file request
- package for DAN BBS 236/111 (the zone does not matter) will be a file
- called:
-
- 00EC006F.REQ
-
- The 00EC is 236 and the 006F is 111, the numbers are converted from
- the Hexnumber system (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F).
- 10 hex = 16 decimal , 000D hex = 13 decimal , FFFF = 65535
- The .REQ means filerequest.
-
- - 90 -
-
- The file is a normal text file with one filename on each line. Like
-
- DANBBS.ARJ
- TERMINAT
-
- If there is a password on files you request you can place a !password after
- the filename. Like: TERMINAT !SECRET (Zoom mail and edit request file)
-
- A flow file is a *.CLO *.HLO *.ILO *.FLO *.DLO. Terminate will think that
- everything other than *.HLO files will be processed. These files are all
- textfiles which have 1 line for each file you want to send.
- A flow file for our system could be 00EC006F.CLO. In this textfile all
- files to be sent will be listed in a special way:
-
- ^C:\PRIVATE\HELLO.TXT
- #C:\TERMINAT\OUT\0000FFE8.TU1
- C:\GRAPHICS\GIF\DPG-0125.GIF
-
- The ^ means to delete the file after transfer. The # means to truncate
- (make filesize = 0) the file after transfer (This is used by some tossers
- to keep the same filename, don't worry about it) Without ^ or # the file
- is just transferred. The 0000FFE8.TU1 is a mail package created by the
- mail-tosser program. Gecho is a tosser/scanner/packer that can do this for
- you. If you want this program you can either filerequest GECHO*.* from
- 236/111 or go online to DAN BBS and download the archive containing the
- program, you will also need a good mail editor. Mail packages can be
- compressed with all kinds of different programs, but currently PKZIP is
- mostly used because it is faster than most other packers.
-
- Call Boss
-
- Calls the number you have specified in the configuration (when handshaking
- Terminate will know the nodenumber (or systems AKA's)) and send all files/
- messages/packages. If you start Terminate with: TERMINAT /BOSS Terminate
- will start up, dial all systems with autodial enabled, then exit Terminate,
- so you can call Terminate from batch files. If you already have a carrier,
- you can enter the pointsystem, then the session will be started at once.
-
- Call system
-
- Call another mailer, either from outbound, a nodelist or manually.
- The manual dial is only for registered persons. This allows you to send
- files or request from any system without knowing their nodenumber.
- You can start Terminate with: TERMINAT /CALL:search-string, the
- search-string can be a nodenumber or a part of name/system/location.
- Then Terminate looks in the nodelists and the first match it finds will
- be polled (called), then Terminate will exit to DOS just like /BOSS.
-
- Send files
-
- Send files to another system. You will be placed in the file manager and
- can select files in both windows. When finished you press return and
- Terminate will create the correct package. If you want to send
- C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT to our system 236/111 Terminate will generate a package in
- the outbound directory called 00EC006F.CLO which only has one line:
- C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT. If Descriptions in setup is 'Yes' Terminate will search
- for descriptions of the files in a file called FILES.BBS or DESCRIPT.ION
- and create a file called 00EC006F.BBS and append it to the .CLO file.
-
- File requests
-
- - 91 -
-
-
- The same as send files. Select the system to request from, then you will
- be placed in the tagmenu, where you can select files from a filelist or
- enter the names manually. That's it. You call the system, Terminate sends
- the requests file, you receive the files as they are found and you are
- allowed to request from that area. It is the system you call that decides
- limits for how much you can request each time.
-
- Kill mail (DELete)
-
- Allows you to remove any packet in the outbound window. If it is a flow
- file and the files were marked for truncation or deletion, you will be
- asked to confirm first.
-
- Auto request { Only in registered version }
-
- ╒══════════════════╤═════════════════════════════════════╡ Auto request ╞╕
- │ Make autorequest │ ┌─>─┐ # Prefix MaxReq node/searchstring/Pxxx (P12)│
- │ Select files │ │ │ 1 1 100 │
- │ Edit numbers │ │ │ 2 1 100 │
- ├──────────────────┤ │ │ 3 1 100 │
- │ Calls : │ │ │ 4 1 100 │
- │ Files left : │ │ │ 5 1 100 │
- │ │ │ │ 6 1 100 │
- │ │ │ │ 7 1 100 │
- │ Space = Next │ │ │ 8 1 100 │
- │ Esc = Abort │ │ │ 9 1 100 │
- │ │ └─<─┘ 10 1 100 │
- ╘══════════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- This function will allow you to enter up to 10 different phone numbers
- where you want to request files from. This function should only be used
- together with systems where you either know the SysOp or where anybody can
- request. Generally this function will allow you to get a lot of files
- without you having to call manually several times. If you define more files
- to be leeched than is allowed by a system on one call, then Terminate will
- keep calling back immediately for the remaining balance each time the
- remote system throws you off. Don't ever try to request files from BBS's
- in the mail hours (2-6 in the morning). Most SysOps don't like somebody
- requesting files when the SysOp expects mail at a specific time, but
- normally you will just get hung up, if the system expects another to call.
- Please do not abuse this system and rip off systems. Please ask the SysOp
- first if he will allow you to request or become a point in fidonet. When
- editing the numbers to call, you must select the dial prefix and the
- maximum files to request. If you call a system and get logged off after 5
- files, you could assume the system only accepts 5 requests each time you
- call, but some systems also use max. size or max. time to decide how much
- or how long a time. You can insert a nodenumber or a search string then the
- nodelists are searched for a number, but you can also get a number from the
- phonebook directly by typing: Pxxx where xxx is the entry number in
- the phonebook.
-
- Pick up mail
-
- If you turn this option off you can send mail to the remote system without
- receiving any mail packets. It could be useful if you, for example have
- been on holiday and there is tons of mail you don't want to read, then you
- can send a netmail to the SysOp that you want to have your mail deleted.
-
- Send AKA's
-
- - 92 -
-
-
- Yes: Send all your AKA's (Also Known As). Terminate will check if the
- nodenumbers in the user profiles are different from 0:0/0 and send them
- all. If NO then only the primary address will be shown to the remote site.
-
- Zoom mail
-
- Shows information on the system to be called, mail-session password,
- and complete dial string. If a request or a flowfile, you are allowed to
- edit the file. Netmail can be viewed with PKTVIEW or the external lister.
- If some of the files you request have passwords, then you can edit the
- .REQ files and enter the password on the same line like this:
- 'BIGTITS.GIF !secret' (secret=password).
-
- Main address
-
- Change your main address, without going into the configuration menu.
-
- Send message
-
- Allows you to write a message to another system. You must know the correct
- network address of the destination. If the system is listed in the
- nodelists you will be asked to confirm the name. If the system is not
- listed you can continue anyway and write the name manually. You now enter
- the subject of the message. 'Hello Joe, how are you' and then the external
- editor will be called. Write your message, save it and the message will be
- placed in the outbound. The filename of an unpacked netmail has the same
- hexnumber prefix (00EC006F), but it always has .CUT as extension. When
- sending the message to the system it will be renamed to a Unix time + .PKT
- before sending. It is not important for you to know these things. Terminate
- will generate the newest .PKT format called Type 2+, the same as Gecho.
-
- Change mail
-
- Change destination for a request, netmail or flow file. Also allowing you
- to put mailpackets or files on hold, so they will be sent later.
-
- Mail editor
-
- Call the external mail editor. Actually you are not forced to use Terminate
- as the menu system, but you can also use some batch files normally provided
- by the tosser or maileditor.
-
- Import
-
- Call a mailtosser, a program like Gecho that will import new incoming mail.
-
- Export
-
- After writing messages in a mail system, you should normally always export
- the messages, before they can be sent.
-
- V View logfile
-
- Allow you to view the entire logfile. Allows you to scroll through
- the last mail session.
-
- Manual { Only in registered version }
-
- If you want to request/send files from/to a system where you don't know
-
- - 93 -
-
- the nodenumber, but just have the phone number you can use this function.
- For requests Terminate will generate a MANUMAIL.REQ which will be renamed
- when you call the next system and sent like a normal request.
- When sending files Terminate will generate a MANUMAIL.CLO file, which
- contain all the names of the files to be sent, then when you call the next
- system they are sent. If you have mail for other systems, delete the file
- again if you cannot get through to the system.
-
-
- - 94 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Cost management ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ╒═════════════════════╤═╡ Cost management ╞╕
- │ Calculate costs │ On │
- │ Cost file 1 │ TERMINAT.CST │
- │ Cost file 2 │ ALTERNA1.CST │
- │ Cost file 3 │ ALTERNA2.CST │
- │ Show at connect │ On │
- │ Show costs after │ On │
- │ Start at once │ Off │
- │ Currency string │ kr │
- │ Decimalpoint │ 2 │
- │ Pay by period │ 0 │
- │ Max costs │ 0,00 │
- │ Max costs per day │ 0,00 │
- │ Cost editor │ │
- │ External editor │ │
- │ 2. currency string │ USD │
- │ 2. currency calc. │ 148 │
- │ 2. calculator │ │
- ╘═════════════════════╧════════════════════╛
-
- Calculate costs
-
- Allow cost calculation. If you do not need any cost calculation at all,
- simply toggle this off. Cost management will be used when calling from the
- phonebook, manually, or with the pointsystem.
- When calling an entry from the phonebook, the costs for that entry will be
- saved in the entry. When you use manual dialing or the pointsystem for
- dialling, the costs will be saved inside entry 0 (manual record) in the
- phonebook. Press Shift+Esc to get current information on which cost
- amount was selected from the costfile.
-
- Cost file 1 Cost file 2 Cost file 3
-
- Name of the cost file: first the utility directory will be searched, then
- the Terminate directory. You can define 3 different costfiles that can
- be connected to a device. So in the phonebook you can select a different
- device which uses another costfile. This is useful in some cases where
- you use ISDN and normal phonelines on the same machine, for example.
-
- Show at connect
-
- Show information on costs on screen at connect time.
-
- Show costs after
-
- When the carrier drops, show information on what the phone company made
- from your call. If you like to call systems and hate knowing how much
- poorer you are afterwards, you should surely turn this off...
-
- Start at once
-
- There should be some kind of international agreement between phone
- companies so that you do not pay anything before the other end has picked
-
- - 95 -
-
- up the phone (no charge for busy calls), but since you never know when the
- phone companies change their policy you should always aim for worst case
- and just start calculating at once, then when you get the bill you might
- not hang yourself anyway.
-
- Currency string
-
- The currency string will normally be grabbed from your COUNTRY.SYS, if you
- had it installed the first time you ran Terminate (or a $).
- It will be shown in all menus where costs are mentioned.
-
- Decimalpoint
-
- The decimal point is important if you want the correct number printed
- on the screen.
-
- 0 1000
- 1 100,0
- 2 10,00
- 3 1,000
-
- Most currencies will use 2 here, but some countries do not use a decimal
- point. This information is also grabbed from COUNTRY.SYS
-
- Pay by period
-
- Some phone companies use a rate per minute and some want payment for
- several minutes in advance.
- A zero here will make Terminate choose the units/minute mode.
- This means that every minute the rate will be added to cost used.
- Any other number will make Terminate act in the period mode.
- The number here defines how many units to add for each period.
- How long the period is, is then defined for each cost entry.
-
- Max costs
-
- After a maximum cost has been exceeded, a window will pop up on screen and
- ask you if you want to hangup. Enter a 0 if you do not want this option
- (for example if your company is paying.)
-
- Max costs per day
-
- If you define an amount here, Terminate will inform you if your daily
- budget has been was exceeded. This should keep you from spending any more
- money. Entering a 0 will disable the feature.
-
- - 96 -
-
-
- Cost editor
-
- ╒═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╡ Cost editor ╞╕
- │ Phone # Days:MTWTFSS Hours Costs in units/minute Start Connect │
- │──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────│
- │ 31 ■ 00:00-24:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 31 ■■■■■■ 08:00-19:30 0.47 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 31 ■■■■■■ 19:30-08:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 33 ■ 00:00-24:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 33 ■■■■■■ 08:00-19:30 0.47 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 33 ■■■■■■ 19:30-08:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 42 ■ 00:00-24:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 42 ■■■■■■ 08:00-19:30 0.47 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 42 ■■■■■■ 19:30-08:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 4362 ■ 00:00-24:00 0.19 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 4362 ■■■■■■ 08:00-19:30 0.37 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 4362 ■■■■■■ 19:30-08:00 0.19 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 43 ■ 00:00-24:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 43 ■■■■■■ 08:00-19:30 0.47 0.00 0.00 │
- │ 43 ■■■■■■ 19:30-08:00 0.24 0.00 0.00 │
- │ ALL ■ 00:00-24:00 0.35 0.00 0.00 │
- │ ALL ■■■■■■ 08:00-19:30 0.70 0.00 0.00 │
- │ ALL ■■■■■■ 19:30-08:00 0.35 0.00 0.00 │
- │ │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
- Enter=Edit Days:1234567 A Add Ins/Del L Reload S Save
-
- Phone #
-
- The cost file is a sequential file that is read from the start and one
- line forward at a time. When it finds a match it stops looking for
- more. This means that you must place longer numbers first like this:
-
- 1 : 4362
- 2 : 43
-
- If the number is 4362 it will return entry 1, a 439999 will give entry 2.
-
- 1 : 43
- 2 : 4362
-
- The above setting is wrong, because it will allways return entry 1.
-
- Days:MTWTFSS
-
- Each cost entry can be defined only to be available on some days in
- the week. Here in Denmark the complete Sunday is half price.
- Press 1-7 to toggle monday-sunday.
-
- Hours
-
- You can also define special hours each day the cost entry will be
- available. In Denmark we only pay half price after 19:30 and until
- 8:00 in the morning.
-
- Costs in units/minute / Add Y units every X second
-
- Enter cost for entry or how many seconds the period lasts.
-
-
- - 97 -
-
- Start
-
- Some phone companies have some kind of penalty for using the phone
- and want you to pay a punishment start fee, but you could also use
- this entry for adjusting the seconds when connecting.
-
- Connect
-
- When you get the connect using the dialer, voice-calls or mail-calls
- you can add this value to the start value only when getting the connect.
- Mostly used for adjusting the phonecalls, but also useful if some
- services have an additional penalty for calling.
-
- External editor
-
- Since the internal editor only allows you to edit 500 entries, you can use
- your external editor instead. If you need to copy several lines or other
- things it could also be faster to use the external editor.
-
- 2. currency string
-
- Used for displaying the secondary currency.
-
- 2. currency calc.
-
- Use a zero to disable this feature.
-
- For calculating the secondary currency you need to know how many percent
- you need to multiply with for getting the value.
-
- For calculating you need the latest rate of exchange on the currency you
- want. Lets say you want to use DKK (Danish Crowns) and USD (US-Dollars)
- as secondary currency.
-
- You need to find out how much you would have to pay for 1000 USD.
- When this document was written the rate of exchange was:
- 1000 USD = 6730 DKK.
-
- To calculate the value: 1000 USD * 1000 / 6730 DKK = 148 (14,8%)
- The number you must enter is 148.
-
- An other example would be if you want the secondary currency in DKK
- and the normal currency in USD.
-
- You need to find out how much you would have to pay for 1000 DKK.
- At the present time 1000 DKK = 148 USD.
-
- To calculate the value: 1000 DKK * 1000 / 148 USD = 6756 (675,6%)
- The number you must enter is 6756.
-
- 2. calculator
-
- Helps you to calculate the above. You just need to know how much you
- would pay for a 1000 of the secondary currency.
-
-
- - 98 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ The Phonebook ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- -=> T E R M I N A T E P H O N E B O O K <=-
-
- TERMINATE indicates which phone directory file is in use. In this example
- TERMINAT.FON has been loaded. The comment ( Private phonebook ) can be
- changed in the Other menu. The first ░·░░░░ field is a menubar that
- indicates where you are in the current phonebook. This will change if you
- press Cursor Up/Down. The second menubar is controlled by cursor Left/right
- and will allow you to see almost anything about the current entries on
- screen.
-
- ▌ TERMINAT ( Private phonebook ) ▐
- ▌ # Name ░·░░░░░░░░░░░░░ ·░░░░░░░░ Phone Number Baud Comm. ▐
- █▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄█
- 2
- 3 ─Get newest Terminate here─ ──────────────────────── 19200 8-N-1
- 4 ▄▄▄▄▄
- 5 ████████▄ Line 1 42643827 19200 8-N-1
- 6 ███▌ ▀████ Line 2 43628230 19200 8-N-1
- 7 ███ ███▌ Line 3 43627750 19200 8-N-1
- 8 ███▌ ▐██▌ Line 4 43625880 19200 8-N-1
- 9 ▐███ ▄███▌ Line 5 43625230 19200 8-N-1
- 10 ▐████████▀ AN BBS Line 6 43623990 19200 8-N-1
- 11 ▀▀▀▀ ISDN 7,8 43661070 64000 8-N-1
- 12 ─────────────────────────── ──────────────────────── 19200 8-N-1
- 14
- █▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀█
- ▌ ··<> Ins/Del Add Edit/View Dial Manual Find Tag: Space, +-* All ▐
- ▌ Sort Import Phonebook Other Global Save Voicecall Copy Cap Note Warndays ▐
-
- Insert
-
- Inserts a new entry at menubar.
-
- Delete
-
- Delete entry at menubar or all tagged entries.
-
- A Add new entry
-
- Add a new entry at the bottom of the phonebook.
-
- D (RETURN) Dial number(s)
-
- Dial the system (or tagged systems) and try to connect.
- You can use the Quickdial just by typing any number 0..9 to
- tag several entries. You can also turn this quick dial bar on in the
- toggles menu. Each number should be seperated by a space: 5 6 7 8 9 10
- will tag and start dialing entries 5-10. To use a keyword instead
- press 0, delete the 0 and type the keyword, systems that match the keyword
- will then be dialled.
-
- - 99 -
-
-
- ╒══════════════╤════════════════════════════════════════════╡ AutoDialer ╞╕
- │ Dial start │ 2-Jun-1993 16.23.16 Entries tagged 1 │
- │ Attempt │ 2-Jun-1993 16.23.17 Try #1 Aborting in 3 seconds │
- ├──────────────┼──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ System │ DANBBS Line 1 │
- │ Username │ Bo Bendtsen │
- │ Phone │ 42643827 │
- │ Comment 1 │ Here you can always get the newest │
- │ Comment 2 │ updates of Terminate │
- │ Password │ ........ │
- │ │ Connects 6 Baud 9600 │
- │ │ Download kb 53 Upload kb 0 │
- │ │ Time used 0.08.47 Costs kr 2,89 │
- │ Last attempt │ │
- │ Next system │ │
- ├──────────────┴──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ Add 15 Untag Edit Retry Space=cycle Return=abort ESC=hangup/abort │
- ├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ ATDT42643827 │
- ╘╡ Alt-J DOS ╞═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╡ Modem ╞╛
-
- Add 15 seconds
-
- Extend dial time by 15 seconds. Remember to set your modem dial time as
- high as possible (S7=255).
-
- Untag entry
-
- Untag entry and dial next number.
-
- Edit entry
-
- Edit this phone entry while dialing.
-
- Retry
-
- Retry number at once.
-
- Space=cycle
-
- Call next tagged number or the same number if no tagged entries.
-
- Return=abort ESC=hangup/abort
-
- Pressing return will start to abort the dialer, but assume that the
- connection will come through in terminal mode. Pressing ESC will first
- hangup the call and then abort the auto-dialer. In toggles you can reverse
- these two keys so they work the other way around.
-
- - 100 -
-
-
- M Manual dial
-
- Jumps to the manual dial menu, here you can call modem or
- voice numbers without having them in the phonebook.
-
- ╒════════════════════╤══════════════════════════════╡ Manual dialing ╞╕
- │ Dial modem number │ 42643827 │
- │ Dial voice number │ 42643827 │
- │ Search nodelist │ 111 │
- │ Nodelist 1 │ UTILS\NODELIST.* │
- │ Nodelist 2 │ C:\NODELIST\NODELIST.* │
- │ Nodelist 3 │ │
- │ Edit manual record │ │
- ╘════════════════════╧════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Record 0 in all phone books will be used to store the last manual dial you
- made. So the costs used and other statistics can be kept up to date.
- Enter the number at Dial modem number / Dial voice number or search for
- the number in the nodelists. You can also edit the manual record if you
- want to setup special emulations or keymaps or anything. When you have
- entered the number in line 1 or 2, press RETURN again for dialing.
-
- F Find entry
-
- When you start to type a search string, the picture will
- change in the background to entries that match your search string.
- You can press Ctrl-Enter to find next match with same search string.
- The fields that will be compared are: System name, Number, Password
- and comments 1+2.
-
- ╒═══════╡ Speed search ╞╕
- │ DAN BBS │
- ╘══ Ctrl-Enter = Next ══╛
-
- SPACE Tag/untag
-
- Tag/untag entries for dialling, copying, deletion.
-
- + Tag all
-
- Tag all entries.
-
- - Untag all
-
- Untag all entries.
-
- * Invert all
-
- Invert tags. All untagged will be tagged and all tagged will be untagged.
-
- - 101 -
-
-
- S Sort menu
-
- Here you can sort the entire phonebook or a range. A range
- indicates which entries to be sorted, start-stop.
-
- ╒══════════════╡ Sort menu ╞╕
- │ Set Range ( 1-14 ) │
- │ Names ascending │
- │ Names descending │
- │ Numbers ascending │
- │ Numbers descending │
- │ Most connects │
- │ Last called │
- │ Comment 1 │
- │ Comment 2 │
- │ Password │
- │ Color │
- │ Name to use │
- │ Baudrate │
- ╘═══════════════════════════╛
-
- I Import
-
- Import menu. In this menu you can import phonebooks from other terminal
- programs and also import BBS-lists, commafiles, nodelists.
- This menu can also Export your phonebook to a commafile, textfile or
- printer.
- ╒════════════════════╡ Import/Export menu ╞╕
- │ Import: Telix phonebook 3.1x/3.2x │
- │ Import: Qmodem phonebook 4.3x │
- │ Import: Qmodem phonebook 5.0x │
- │ Import: Qmodem Pro phonebook 1.00 │
- │ Import: TeleMate phonebook 3.10/4.00 │
- │ Import: FrontDoor user-profiles 2.xx │
- │ Import: FrontDoor phonebook 2.xx │
- │ Import: Procomm phonebook 2.4.x │
- │ Import: PCPLUS phonebook 1.00 │
- │ Import: PCPLUS phonebook 2.0x │
- │ Import: Procomm+ for Windows 1.00 │
- │ Import: Communiqué 2.00 │
- │ Import: RenCom Pro 2.00 │
- │ Import: Definable BBSlist │
- │ Import: Nodelist segment │
- │ Import: Find/import nodes from nodelist │
- │ Import: Commafile │
- │ Export: Commafile │
- │ Export: Phonebook to printer/textfile │
- │ Export: Userprofiles to textfile │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- If the import of a phonebook goes wrong and there is suddenly a lot of
- garbage in the phonebook, just mark all the entries and press DELETE to
- remove them again.
-
- - 102 -
-
-
- BBSlist
-
- ╒═════════════════════╤════════════════╡ Import from definable BBSlist ╞╕
- │ Start converting │ │
- │ Filename │ DK-BBS.TXT │
- │ Name start/stop │ 1 24 │
- │ Number start/stop │ 26 33 │
- │ Baud start/stop │ 35 39 │
- │ Comment1 start/stop │ 49 79 │
- │ Comment2 start/stop │ 81 108 │
- │ Password start/stop │ 0 0 │
- ├─────────────────────┴─────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ If start or stop is 0 field will be skipped │
- │ A line starts at 1 and ends at 255, both positions will be included │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- This allows you to import any textfile with any format you might like to
- specify. The start/stop values is the positions on the lines where the
- import function will grab the value or string. The baudrate will be
- grabbed into a string then Terminate will test the 2 first places and
- assume the following.
- 12->1200 , 24->2400 , 48->4800 , 96->9600 , 14->14400 , 16->16800
- So if the baudrate is grabbed from '14400 HST/V32' then 14400 is used.
- This was made because some BBS-lists only give you the first 2 numbers
- of the baudrate, so that more information can be put on the same line.
- Look in the DK-BBS.TXT file for some examples.
-
- Import from nodelists
-
- A complete segment can be imported. This could be used to import your
- fidonet's list of all the nodes in your net. It must be a raw, uncompiled
- standard fidonet nodelist.
-
- Import/Export comma separated files
-
- Some database program will be able to import comma delimited files so just
- export and look in the file. The first line in an exported file will
- always show the format used in Terminate.
-
- Export: Phonebook to printer/textfile
-
- Here you can print out all or part of the phonebook. You can also select
- if you only want tagged entries to be exported. You can limit the export
- to 80 chars, then only the most important information is exported.
- Remember if you export to another printer you should choose textfile
- and enter LPT2 or LPT3.
-
- P Change phonebook
-
- If you have several phonebooks. It is advisable to use as
- small a phonebook as possible to save memory. You could import a BBS list
- or a nodelist segment. And then only copy single entries to your daily
- phonebook with the copy function. You could also have a phonebook for your
- private needs and one for your work. Try to divide it up in smaller books
- to make it easier for you to find the numbers again. You could also
- separate the groups by giving the entries a different color for each group.
-
- O Other functions
-
-
- - 103 -
-
- Here you can change the comment for the phonebook, see the
- totals for the phonebook and a complete cost calculation for one year back.
- Terminate has one of the most advanced cost calculation features found in
- any terminal program. Thanks to many users in different countries, it
- should come very close to your real bill.
- You can print out (or save in file) a LARGE report, telling you all the
- information on this page and cost information statistics for every phone
- entry in the phonebook. You could use this to give to your company to prove
- you really have used the phone so much if they are paying.
-
- ╒═══════════════════╤═════════════════════════════════╡ Other information ╞╕
- │ Phonebook comment │ Private phonebook Size: 120kb │
- │ Total connects │ 0 │
- │ Total time used │ 0.00.00 │
- │ Total transfered │ Upload kb: 0 Download kb: 0 │
- ├───────────────────┼──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ Generate report │ C O S T S T A T I S T I C S │
- │ │ │
- │ May 1992 │ ┌────────────────────┐ $ 0,00 │
- │ June 1992 │ │ Last 2 months │ $ 0,00 │
- │ July 1992 │ │ $ 0,00 │ $ 0,00 │
- │ August 1992 │ │ Last 3 months │ $ 0,00 │
- │ September 1992 │ │ $ 0,00 │ $ 0,00 │
- │ October 1992 │ │ Last 6 months │ $ 0,00 │
- │ November 1992 │ │ $ 0,00 │ $ 0,00 │
- │ December 1992 │ │ Last 9 months │ $ 0,00 │
- │ January 1993 │ │ $ 0,00 │ $ 0,00 │
- │ February 1993 │ └────────────────────┘ $ 0,00 │
- │ March 1993 │ $ 0,00 │
- │ April 1993 │ Phonebook $ 0,00 │
- │ April 1993 │ Manual+Pointsystem $ 0,00 │
- │ │ ────────────────── │
- │ Total │ $ 0,00 │
- ╘═══════════════════╧══════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- - 104 -
-
-
- G Global changes
-
- The global menu. The functions in this menu can change more than 1 entry at
- a time. Almost every important function can be changed globally or in a
- specified range of entries. For example, you could change the baudrate for
- entries 5 - 10, by changing first the range and then choose change baud.
-
- ╒═══════════════════╡ Global edit ╞╕
- │ Set Range ( 1-14 ) │
- │ Only tagged No │
- │ Find/Replace baud │
- │ Change baud rates │
- │ Change device │
- │ Auto login │
- │ Download path │
- │ Username │
- │ Colors │
- │ Terminal │
- │ Protocol │
- │ Dial prefix │
- │ Tag entries in range │
- │ Strip/Insert '-' in number 3 │
- │ Find/Tag │
- │ Tag bad phonenumbers │
- │ Tag all with password │
- │ Copy password to range │
- │ Clear last call │
- │ Clear costs │
- │ Clear time used │
- │ Echo=Off, Strip=Off, BS=On │
- │ Clear connects │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════╛
-
- V Save phonebook
-
- Save the phonebook at once. The phonebook is always saved if any changes
- have been made or any numbers have been dialled. The phonebook is saved
- whenever you change to a new phonebook or exit Terminate.
- When saving a phonebook and the backup system is enabled (default), the
- current .FON will be renamed to .PBK and the new phonebook will be saved as
- .FON. If the .FON file is missing Terminate will try to load the .PBK file.
- This function is normally used where you have made a lot of changes and
- want to be sure nothing can go wrong, eg: in a DOS-shell or anywhere else
- that could cause the machine to hang.
-
- - 105 -
-
-
- L Voicecall
-
- Allows you to call human beings. The screen has information on
- current time, how much time has elapsed and the cost of the call. When the
- modem has dialled, pick up the real 'phone and press the spacebar.
-
- ╒═══════════╤═══════════════════════╡ Voice call ╞╕
- │ Human │ Bo Bendtsen │
- │ Number │ 4264???? (Ohh now I forgot) │
- │ Time │ 16:05:12 │
- │ Time used │ 00:05:23 │
- │ $ │ 1,25 │
- ├───────────┴─────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ │
- │ Pick up phone then press space. Esc to abort │
- │ Delaying in 60 │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- C Copy menu
-
- Copy entries to other places in the phonebook or to another phonebook.
-
- T (Alt-L) Edit capture file
-
- Capture file. Edit the capture file for the entry under the menubar, if it
- is specified in the entry.
-
- N (Alt-N) Edit note file
-
- Notes. Each phonebook entry can have a comment file attached. It will be
- placed in the same directory as the phonebooks. You can enter any kind of
- information you like here.
-
- W Warn days
-
- Will flash all entries which have not been dialled for a set
- number of days (default 30 days). Useful if you do not want to be deleted
- by a system. Normally, users records on public BBS's are deleted if they
- have not called for 1-3 months. Now you can know quickly which entries
- you need to call to avoid deletion.
-
- Alt-J DOS-shell
-
- Invokes DOS-shell
-
- Alt-X Exit
-
- Exit Terminate
-
-
- - 106 -
-
-
- -=> E D I T P H O N E E N T R Y <=-
-
- E Edit entry
-
- ╒═══════════════════╤═════════════════════════════╡ View/Edit phone entry ╞╕
- │ System name │ DAN BBS Line 1 │ │
- │ Phone number │ 42643827 │ 1 Local Echo Off │
- │ Device │ COM1 19200 8N1 │ 2 StripHigh Off │
- │ User profile │ Bo Bendtsen │ 3 Rcvd BS dest On │
- │ Password │ │ 4 Color ■ │
- │ Opening hours │ 00:00 - 24:00 │ │
- │ Terminal │ Avatar/Ansi └────────────────────────┤
- │ Dial prefix │ ATDT │
- │ Dial suffix │ ^M │
- │ Comm. information │ 14400,8N1 │
- │ Autologin │ Escapes, Name, Password │
- │ Comment 1 │ Hst, v32, only above 9600 │
- │ Comment 2 │ ├──────────────────────────────────────┤ │
- │ Download path │ I:\ │
- │ Keyboard mapping │ .KBD │
- │ Translation table │ .XLT │
- │ Capture file │ .CAP │
- │ Note file │ .NOT │
- │ Clear last call │ │
- │ Time used/Connect │ Time used: 0.00.00 Connects : 0 │
- │ Transfer guess │ Upload kb: 0 Download kb: 0 │
- │ Costs used │ Total : 0,00 This month : 0,00 │
- ╘═══════════════════╧══════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
- Name of the system to call
-
- System name
-
- Name of the system or person this entry describes
-
- Phone number
-
- Number to dial to reach the system or person
-
- Device
-
- For every system you can specify a device. The devices can be set up in
- the configuration. This is mostly used if you have several modems
- connected to your system. You can select between all available devices or
- choose to use the default or current device. If you choose the current
- device, the Com Port will not be changed at all when dialling. If the
- default device is chosen, then the startup device will be used.
- If the device is changed before dialing, then init string for this device
- will be sent before sending the dial command.
- For more information, see how to setup a device.
-
- User profile
-
- Which name and default password should be used for the autologin
- procedure. If the autologin fails, you can press Alt-N to send the
- username manually and Alt-S to send the password.
-
- Password
-
- Used at autologin procedure, if you do not define a separate password for
-
- - 107 -
-
- each entry, the default password for the active user profile is used.
-
- Opening hours
-
- Some systems are only open for a limited time during the day or night.
- You can specify the opening and closing time and then Terminate will warn
- you and ask if you are sure you want to call anyway.
-
- Terminal
-
- Choose which kind of emulations the remote end supports. Look at the Help
- for Terminal Emulation to get more information. Press Alt-T in terminal
- mode to change.
-
- Dial prefix Dial suffix
-
- In Terminate you can choose between 6 dial prefixes. 1-5 are normal
- prefixes and 6 should be used for international calls, but you can also
- use them for any purpose you find right. Normally 'ATDT' is used for Hayes
- compatible modems. That starts the modem tone dialling a number. AT is the
- Hayes `ATtention' that prefixes most commands. If Pulse dialling is needed
- you would choose ATDP.
- The suffix is what to send after the number has been sent to the modem.
- Terminate dials like this:
-
- Prefix + Number + Suffix
- ATDT43623990^M
-
- The ^M means Return (ASCII #13), it will be replaced with a #13.
-
- Comm. information
-
- These fields are only used for information about the remote system - they
- will not affect communication parameters in any way. So you can specify
- here if the system is using a bps rate your modem supports even though you
- perhaps always use 19200 or 38400 in the device. Terminate will insert the
- connect bps rate at the phone entry every time you call a system
- (including 7200, 12000, 14400, 16800, 24000, 28800, 64000, 76800,128000)
- to inform you which bps rate the system last accepted when you called.
- This feature can be turned off in configuration. Note that there is a big
- difference in connect bps and the bps (DTE speed) between your modem and
- computer.
-
- DTE-speed DCE-speed DTE-speed
- Computer ─────────── Modem ────phoneline──── Modem ─────────── Computer
- (DTE=Data Terminal equipment, DCE=Data communications equipment)
-
- Between your computer and the modem, the baudrate depends on which
- baudrate you specify in the device setup. Depending on which modem you
- use the modems could transfer data with different baudrates than the
- serial port. DTE-speed = device baudrate, DCE-speed = phonebook
- baudrate. Terminate will also recognize baudrate 64000/128000 used with
- ISDN lines.
-
- Autologin
-
- Which Autologin script to try after you have connected. You can define
- your own small login scripts if you call systems that need scripts other
- than the default scripts.
-
-
- - 108 -
-
- Comment 1 Comment 2
-
- Place anything on these lines -used when importing from BBS and nodelists.
-
- Download path
-
- Which default download path should be used for the phonebook entry.
- Terminate lets you pre-define 3 different paths, so if you have a download
- directory for GIF files, you could tell Terminate to download directly
- into that directory. To change this in terminal mode, press Alt-R
-
- Keyboard mapping
-
- Load a keyboard file when calling this system. This will allow you to load
- a keyboard file, where you have defined function keys and other special
- keys. You can load a keyboard file in terminal mode by pressing Alt-=,
- (the key to the left of the backspace on international keyboards).
-
- Translation table
-
- You can also load a translation file when calling a system. It will change
- incoming and outgoing characters. This is often used with systems only
- running 7-bit, Unix installation and other host systems.
- Press Alt-W in terminal mode to create/load/save/reset translation
- files.
-
- Capture file
-
- Terminate has a capture file system. If a filename is specified in the
- entry a capture file will be opened when you connect to that system.
- You can either remove the filename again by pressing DEL or turn off
- the Autocapture system in the configuration or press Alt-0 in terminal
- mode. Pressing Alt-L in that menu will call the external editor and
- allow you to directly edit/view the capture file.
-
- Note file
-
- For each entry you can define a note file where you can keep any kind of
- information. You could save a filelist or a little summary of what the
- system needs or whatever you like. To edit this note file, you press
- Alt-N in this menu. This file will be used as the SmartNote if you
- press Alt-A from terminal mode.
-
- Clear last call
-
- Every time you call a system, the date and time of the call is saved in
- the phone entry. Pressing return on this entry removes this date/time -
- so it then looks as if you have not called that system.
-
- Time used/Connects
-
- Allows you to edit the number of seconds used online and how many
- connects you have made to this system.
-
- Transfer guess
-
- Edit how many kilobytes down/up-loaded to that system. When you use
- external protocols, Terminate has to guess how much. Terminate first
- checks how many files and how big the download directory is. It then
- performs the external transfer, checks again and calculates the
-
- - 109 -
-
- difference. This can only be a guess, since maybe you are working on a
- network and delete some files in the meantime in that directory, but that
- is also why you can manually edit the value if anything goes wrong and you
- like keeping track of how much you have transferred.
-
- Costs used
-
- The 1st entry is the total cost of all calls to this system and will be
- updated after each call if you use the Cost management option. The 2nd
- entry will also be updated each time you call but, when a new month
- starts, this amount is placed in the `Last Month Used Account' and the
- 2nd entry zeroed.
-
- Local Echo
-
- Echo all characters sent to the modem on screen. Always turned off
- normally.
-
- StripHigh
-
- Strip all characters above ASCII 127 on incoming traffic. Should not
- be used normally.
-
- Erase backspace
-
- If this option is On, pressing backspace (ASCII 8) will move the cursor 1
- back and erase the character; Off will only move the cursor 1 back.
- Default is On.
-
- Color
-
- Select the color you want for this phonebook entry.
-
-
- - 110 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ File tagging and tagmenu ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- Tagging files is one of the most used features in Terminate. It will save
- you hundreds of small little notes and allow you to start downloading files
- faster. The Alt-F5 filetagger will try to identify all possible filenames
- on screen, then, when you move the cursor up or down, the menubar will jump
- to the next file it has identified.
-
- File tagger keys
-
- SPACE Tag or untag file
- + Tag all files found on screen
- - Untag all
- * Tagged files gets untagged and untagged gets tagged (inverse)
- E Edit tagged name.
-
- File tagger cursor movements
-
- Up Move up to previous found filename
- Down Move down to next found filename
- Right Increase position of menubar by 1
- Left Decrease position of menubar by 1
- Shift+Right Increase size of menubar by 1
- Shift+Left Decrease size of menubar by 1
- Shift+Up Decrease found line by 1
- Shift+Down Increase found line by 1
-
- When you press escape all tagged files are saved and can now be reached from
- the tag menu. You can also check an entire file list quickly and then
- scrollback with Alt-B and tag files from there. Remember that no online
- remote tagger will react as quickly as doing the tagging locally.
-
- - 111 -
-
-
- Tag menu
-
- The tag menu will work a little differently depending on if you use the
- menu from Alt-F6 (download) or Alt-F7 and filerequest.
-
- ╒═╡ Tag options ╞══╤═════════════╤═════════════╤═════════════╤═╡ Tag menu ╞╕
- │ A Edit tagfile │■DANBBS.ARJ │ │ │ │
- │ C Clear all │ │ │ │ │
- │ D Delete (■) │ │ │ │ │
- │ L Load tagfile │ │ │ │ │
- │ S Save tagfile │ │ │ │ │
- │ E Edit entry │ │ │ │ │
- │ I Import dir │ │ │ │ │
- │ F Filelists │ │ │ │ │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- │ M Magic G GenTag │ │ │ │ │
- │ B Sort U Untag │ │ │ │ │
- │ Del Remove entry │ │ │ │ │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- │ ■=Sent │ │ │ │ │
- │ Space │ │ │ │ │
- │ Send name+Space │ │ │ │ │
- │ Return │ │ │ │ │
- │ Send name+Return │ │ │ │ │
- │ + All+13 - All+32│ │ │ │ │
- │ Esc to exit │ │ │ │ │
- │ Tagged files 1 │ │ │ │ │
- │ Tagged from: │ │ │ │ │
- │ DAN BBS │ │ │ │ │
- ╘══════════════════╧═════════════╧═════════════╧═════════════╧═════════════╛
-
- The 'Tagged files' indicates the total of tagged entries.
- The 'Tagged from:' will show on which system you tagged the file. If you
- change phonebooks it will not show the correct system. The phonebook has
- to be loaded to see where you have tagged the files. Call a system or
- press Alt-D, Esc to load the phonebook.
-
- A Edit tagfile
-
- Edit any tag file with the external editor. If you have called a system,
- Terminate will suggest a filename that looks like the system name, but
- actually you can edit any file from here.
-
- C Clear all
-
- Clean the screen and throw away all files that you have tagged.
-
- D Delete (■)
-
- When you send the filename back with one of the functions here, you can
- clean up the screen. This is useful if you have tagged 50 or more files
- and have collected the first 10.
-
- L Load tagfile
-
- Load any textfile into the tag menu. The first word will be grabbed
- from each line.
-
- S Save tagfile
-
- - 112 -
-
-
- If you suddenly need to save the tagged files. Lets say you are online and
- have just tagged 20-30 files and suddenly your mum arrives and you have
- again forgotten the time because of those damn computers, now you just save
- the tagfile and when she has left again, you load the tagged files again
- and call the system and download the rest of the files.
-
- E Edit entry
-
- Edit manually the entries on screen.
-
- I Import dir
-
- You can import a local directory with all the files.
- This option could be useful when uploading, if you have a directory with a
- lot of files you want to upload to a system, you might be asked to enter
- the names first with the remote system checking if the file is already
- present on the remote system.
-
- F Filelist
-
- The menu will handle all the filelist features in Terminate.
- A filelist is a large (ASCII) text file. Such lists can be downloaded
- from almost anywhere, no matter which kind of system you are using.
- Look at the example DANBBS.TXT file in the FILELIST\ directory if you
- have any doubts about what a filelist could look like.
- Remember that whenever you use the internal viewer on a filelist
- or any other file for that matter that contains filenames, you can tag
- the files by pressing T and then the filenames are imported into
- the Tagmenu.
-
- You can also change the setup in Alt-O, F, Filelist manager.
-
- ┌─┤ Select filelist action ├┐
- │ Turbo Search │
- │ View filelist │
- │ Tag from list │
- │ Pack filelists │
- │ Unpack filelists │
- │ Filemanager │
- └───────────────────────────┘
-
- - 113 -
-
-
- Turbo Search
-
- This function will quickly and easily search through all your filelists
- for a wildcard like ????TER1.* (Terminate) or T-???-??.* (manuals). A
- wildcard search is enabled if your search string contains a * or a ?,
- otherwise a normal search on your full search string is performed.
-
- ┌──────────────┬──────────────────────────────────┤ Searching for '*.LZH' ├┐
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ DANBBS.LZH 3104330 23/12-93 001-200 ALL Complete f │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ DANBBS!.LZH 374321 23/12-93 001-200 ALL-XCD Filelist w │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ DAN_7D.LZH 4725 04/01-93 001-200 NEWS News last │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ DAN_14D.LZH 7702 04/01-93 001-200 NEWS News last │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ DAN_30D.LZH 17778 04/01-93 001-200 NEWS News last │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ LISTFIND.LZH 10602 07/12-92 Utility to search in fileli │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ T-CFG10.LZH 23249 23/12-93 Export/Import Terminate con │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ T-CFG11.LZH 23499 23/12-93 Export/Import Terminate con │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ T-CFG12.LZH 23735 23/12-93 Export/Import Terminate con │
- │ DANBBS.TXT │ T-CFG13.LZH 23735 23/12-93 Export/Import Terminate con │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ BP7UPG.LZH 4,413 11/03/92 | Upgrade info for BP7 (c │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ ALARM.LZH 10,147 10/14/92 | Source code example for │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ ALLOC.LZH 6,598 03/25/91 | Allocate heap blocks la │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ APINST.LZH 29,597 01/11/94 | APRO 2.0 install progra │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ ASYNC4.LZH 5,200 08/14/92 | Basic Async routines (P │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ BDISK.LZH 9,925 10/29/93 | BIOS floppy read, write │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ BIGED3.LZH 57,290 05/12/93 | BigEd V3 w/ virtual mem │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ BIOSFIX.LZH 1,674 06/09/91 | Adds UART addresses to │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ BIOSPRN.LZH 3,751 09/30/92 | BiosPrinter object for │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ BTREEMAN.LZH 7,595 12/11/92 | Diffs between 2nd and 3 │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ BTVCALC.LZH 2,404 02/10/93 | B-Tree variable record │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ CACHE.LZH 3,144 10/21/92 | Cached PickList object │
- │ TURBOPOW.TXT │ CALIBRAT.LZH 8,023 03/28/90 | Program for determining │
- └──────────────┴───┤ 2 TURBOPOW.TXT Space=Next Lines 255 ├──┘
-
- View filelist
-
- Quick select and view of one filelist.
-
- Tag from list
-
- You can tag directly from filelists. First you will be asked to select a
- filelist. Then 'keyword or wildcard'. If you enter a normal DOS
- wildcard filename like '*.ZIP' all lines will be searched for a .ZIP file,
- but if you do not enter a wildcard each line in the filelist will be
- searched for matches. So, if you enter VGA, all lines having the word 'VGA'
- will be available. The limit is 250 matches. The list can be sorted
- alphabetically if you like. You can now select from the found matches. Just
- mark all the files you want with SPACE or press + for marking all files
- found. - will unmark all and * will toggle all tags. When pressing Esc
- all files tagged will now be imported into the tag menu (if there is room
- for them).
- The tagged lines will also be saved in the download path (or inbound) in a
- file called FILES.BBS so you have the descriptions. Thus, you will not need
- the BBS to send you an extra file with the descriptions (if the system does
- it anyway, just delete the file.)
- With this option you will never need to spend much online time looking for
- new files. If you have a high speed modem, just download the filelist,
- search it manually and tag all the files off-line. Then dial the system
- and use the tag menu to select the files.
-
-
- - 114 -
-
- Pack filelists
-
- Pack all the files in the filelist directory into LISTPACK.ZIP, if you
- define another packer like ARJ then LISTPACK.ARJ will be used.
-
- Unpack filelists
-
- Unpack all the files in the packed LISTPACK.ZIP. All the list functions
- will look for LISTPACK and ask if you want to unpack the files first.
-
- Filemanager
-
- Start up filemanager in the filelist directory for manual processing.
-
- M Magic
-
- Magic names is a commonly used term in fidonet and means the same as alias.
- In this way, some systems have aliases for some special files that can be
- requested from the system.
-
- G GenTag
-
- Call any external utility you like. Normally this should point to a utility
- that could generate a TERMINAT.TAG file that could be imported here.
-
- B Sort
-
- Sort all entries alphabetically.
-
- U UnTag
-
- Untag the file.
-
- Del Remove entry
-
- Delete the tagged file.
-
- ■=Sent / ■=Request
-
- Depending on if you called the tagmenu with Alt-F6 or when file
- requesting from Alt-F7, the tagged files have different meanings.
- Download: ■ means that you have already tried to download the file once.
- Request : ■ means that this file should be requested.
-
- Space / Return
-
- Download: Send name + Space/Return (ASCII #32/#13). Some systems allow you
- to enter several filenames on the same line. Let's say you have 3 files you
- want to download. First press space on the two first files and then press
- return on the last file: 'FILE1.EXT FILE2.EXT FILE3.EXT'+return.
- Just as if you typed the line yourself.
-
- Request: When you edit an entry the ■ means: YES! request this file,
- please. You can toggle this entry with the spacebar if you suddenly decide
- you don't want the file anyway. Press return when you are finished tagging
- files. If you do not want to request anyway just press Esc.
-
- + All+13 - All+32 / +-* Toggle all
-
- Download: Pressing + will send all the filenames separated by a return
-
- - 115 -
-
- (#13). - will do the same thing, but separated with a space (#32) instead.
-
- Request: + will select all files to be requested. - will deselect all the
- files and * will toggle all files.
-
-
- - 116 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ The Filemanager ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- -=> T E R M I N A T E F I L E M A N A G E R <=-
-
- The file manager is a complete tool for managing all your DOS command needs.
- It has the same sort of features as programs like Norton Commander 3.0,
- QDOS, PCTOOLS, etc. With this you can manage all your needs and a little
- extra too.
-
- Changing directory
-
- To change directory, press Cursor Right. To change to the parent
- directory press Cursor Left.
-
- Drive colours
-
- The colours are referred to as: Normal, High and Bold.
- (Default Terminate colours: Normal=Gray, High=Cyan, Bold=Yellow).
-
- ╒╡ Terminate Commander ╞═══════════════════════════════════╡ File manager ╞╕
- │ Ctrl+drv to change: A B C D E·F·G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z │
- │ Mask: *.* Path: C:\ │
- └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- The top is used to display which drives are available in your system.
- colours mean:
-
- Drive not present = Normal
- Drive present = High
- Current drive = Bold
-
- · · Around a letter will show which path is available when pressing the TAB
- key. Small letters will always be CD-ROM drives (only when MSCDEX loaded).
- For a FAST change to another available drive, just hold down Ctrl and press
- the letter of the desired drive. Then the current directory on that drive
- will become current. Note that you can turn off drives to test in the
- configuration (general options 1) if some drives are too slow to test, like
- a CD-ROM or a tape streamer used as a special drive. A and B will always be
- highlighted even though they may not be available.
-
- K Mask
-
- Mask is the wildcard mask when reading the files in the current directory.
- If you use *.EXE or *.GIF only those files will be used. You can also use
- jokers (?) which only replace 1 character in the mask.
-
- P Enter/create path
-
- When pressing P you can enter the complete path manually. If you want to
- create a sub directory you can also use the command. Just enter the new
- path and you will be asked to confirm creation. (Like: MD MKDIR).
-
-
- The small window below will tell you the size and how much free space is on
- the current disk. If the drive is a CD-ROM then it will say so and Free
-
- - 117 -
-
- space will always be 0, since it isn't possible to write to a CD-ROM (at
- least not yet). Selected/Bytes/transfer time shows the status of files
- tagged and how long it would take to transfer them via modem, calculated on
- the CPS (characters per second) - which you can change when pressing T.
- Normally the maximum bps rate divided by 10 will give you this
- approximately.
-
- ┌───────────────────────────┐
- │ Disk size 244.834.304 │
- │ Disk free 18.702.336 │
- │ Selected 0 │
- │ Bytes 0 │
- │ Transfer time => 0.00.00 │
- └───────────────────────────┘
-
- Below is an example window with directories and files. Any directories will
- be highlighted and will have <DIR> as size. It will show all information
- needed about the files in the current path, but you can also choose to have
- 2 windows at the same time. Press W to toggle windows, then you will not
- get so much information but you will be able to see and use 2 paths at the
- same time.
-
- Attributes are defined as follows:
-
- R = Read Only Nobody can write/delete the file/directory
- H = Hidden File/Directory is hidden when using the DIR command
- S = System File/directory is used by DOS or other operating system
- A = Archive This attribute is normally used to determine if the
- file should be backed up, but it can be used for other
- things also.
-
- Place the menubar on an entry and press A to change both the attributes on
- files and directories. The time shown after the attribute information is how
- long in minutes and seconds it would take to transfer the file with the
- current CPS.
-
- ┌────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ Name Date Time Size Attr -=> │
- ├─────────────────────────────────────────────┤C├┤
- │ DOS 17-Mar-93 19:57 <DIR> ---- 0:00 │
- │ TERMINAT 17-Mar-93 19:57 <DIR> ---- 0:00 │
- │ AUTOEXEC.BAT 3-Apr-93 17:02 1229 ---A 0:00·│
- │ COMMAND.COM 9-Apr-91 5:00 47845 ---A 0:24·│
- │ CONFIG.SYS 1-Apr-93 17:36 939 ---A 0:00 │
- │ COUNTRY.SYS 7-Feb-91 5:48 16992 ---A 0:08 │
- │ IO.SYS 9-Apr-91 5:00 33430 RHSA 0:17 │
- │ MSDOS.SYS 9-Apr-91 5:00 37394 RHSA 0:19 │
- ╘════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- - 118 -
-
-
- ┌───────────────────────────┐
- │ <>.\ Directory commands │
- │ +-* All Space (Un)Tag │
- │ TAB Change to window 2 │
- │ T CPS estimate 1920 │
- │ Sort Nam/Ext/Date/Siz/No │
- │ Copy Dir size │
- │ Move View │
- │ Rename Edit │
- │ Delete File Find │
- │ Attributes Windows │
- │ Jump to DOS Disk info │
- │ Compare menu Extensions │
- │ DOS command │
- └───────────────────────────┘
-
- Movements
-
- Use cursor-up/down keys to move up and down the files/directories.
- Terminate also uses QUICK-keys, which means you can press ALT-A..ALT-Z
- To move the menubar to the next file starting with that letter.
-
- Left cursor (< An arrow pointing to the left)
-
- Will change to the parent directory. If you are in C:\DOS and press left
- cursor you will be in C:\, nothing will happen if you are already in the
- ROOT directory. This is much faster than other systems which first want you
- to move up to a parent or .. dir and press return.
-
- Right cursor (> An arrow pointing to the right)
-
- If you are positioned on a directory and press right arrow you will change
- to that directory. The reason why RETURN is not used is because when
- you upload, RETURN will start the transfer. Please get used to using the
- arrows, then you will notice how MUCH faster it is to navigate your hard
- disk.
-
- . Reread
-
- If you press the period, all drives will be re-tested to see if they are
- available, including drives which were excluded at configuration.
-
- \ Change to root
-
- A backslash will change to the ROOT directory on the current drive
-
- + Tag all
-
- Will tag all files
-
- - Untag all
-
- Will untag all files
-
- * Invert all
-
- Invert tags. All tagged files will be untagged and all untagged will be
- tagged.
-
-
- - 119 -
-
- SPACE Tag
-
- Tag/untag file under menubar.
- If you tag a GIF file then the picture information for the file you just
- tagged will be shown at the bottom line of the current file window.
-
- TAB Change window
-
- The filemanager can use 2 different paths, and you can switch between
- the paths by pressing TAB.
-
- T Enter CPS
-
- Enter CPS (characters per second) to base calculations on with total
- selected files and for each file. The normal CPS is a little less than
- your baudrate divided by 10. (19200 = 1920, 14400 = 1440, 2400 = 240).
-
- S Sort files
-
- Allows you to select how you want the files sorted in the current file
- window.
-
- Nam Filename
- Ext Extension, then filename
- Date Newest files at top
- Siz Biggest files at top
- No No sort
-
- C Copy file(s) (Print textfiles)
-
- Copy file at menubar - if any files are tagged they will be copied to
- another directory. If no files are tagged and the menubar is on a file then
- you could copy the file to another filename, just like a rename but you
- will also have the original file. If you are on a network, copying a large
- file or many files could slow the server down so you can press W while
- copying to enable the wait function after copying a file. Then Terminate
- will wait filesize / 100000 seconds between each file (min-max 1-12 sec.).
- If you need to print the file just enter PRN as destination name or
- LPT2,LPT3 depending on which port your printer is located.
-
-
- M Move file(s)
-
- Move file or files to another file directory, works just like COPY, but
- then deletes the file afterwards.
-
- R Rename file
-
- Rename a file or a directory
-
- D (DEL) Delete file(s)
-
- Delete a file or a directory. You can also press the key called DEL/DELETE.
- If you try to delete a directory and it is not empty, you will be asked to
- confirm deletion of the entire directory and all sub-entries, normally
- called a KILLTREE function.
-
- A Change attributes
-
- Change attributes (see above) of a directory or a file.
-
- - 120 -
-
-
- J DOS-Shell
-
- DOS-shell, calls COMMAND.COM (COMSPEC) and lets you execute whatever you
- like. You can setup how to swap memory out first in the configuration.
-
- U Compare paths
-
- Compares the 2 paths and tags files either IN or NOT IN the other window.
-
- N Send filename
-
- When you are online and want to upload some files, you will sometimes
- be asked to enter the filenames first. This function will send the
- filename on the current line and a space (in case of several files).
-
- Z Tree-size
-
- Will calculate the size of the current and all sub-directories.
-
- V View file
-
- View the file under the menubar. Calls the external lister program.
-
- E Edit file
-
- Edit the file under the menubar. Call the external editor.
-
- F Find file(s)
-
- Finds a file. You can enter a wildcard (*,?) filename. The current drive
- will first be searched, then all available drives. You can press space to
- skip the current search drive. Return to select file, or abort with ESC.
- When a file is found, the manager will change to the directory where the
- file is, tag the file and place the menubar on the file.
-
- W Window display style
-
- Toggle between 1 window or 2 windows display
-
- I Disk information
-
- Shows information on all available drives and if any drives are SUBST or
- remapped by a network. (Resolved path).
- You will be asked for a minimum free disk space warning value and an update
- timer, so you can update every x seconds. If you are on a network you can
- use it to monitor drives - so if the free space remaining on any drive is
- below the warn value, the size will flash and a beep will sound.
-
- X Edit extensions
-
- Works almost like Norton Commander. Please look in the file TERMINAT.EXT
- for more information on how to set this up.
- Lots of extensions are defined as a default. Let's say you press return on
- a file called HELLO.TXT. Then the external editor will be called and you
- can edit the file. You can identify all the files where an extension has
- been found by the · at the same line as the filename.
-
- │ AUTOEXEC.BAT 3-Apr-93 17:02 1229 ---A 0:00·│
- \______found
-
- - 121 -
-
-
- O DOS-command
-
- Here you can enter any command you like. When you then press return the
- command will be executed. You can enter a !M to swap out memory if this was
- not already selected in the configuration. But also a !F or !D which will
- be replaced with the name under the menubar and the current directory.
-
- B Both paths
-
- Make this window the same path as the other window.
-
- The bottom line is all your external utilities which you can setup in the
- configuration. Look there for help on how to set these up. The programs
- are called when you press F1..F10 (also F11,F12).
-
- If you are located in a mail directory (outbound) with mail files then the
- address of the file will be calculated and shown in the bottom line of the
- current file window.
-
- Q Quiet
-
- Disable / enable the entire left side. Mostly used by blind persons.
-
- Fido-style address
-
- Terminate will try to calculate the nodenumber of mail-files. However this
- is not always possible, so sometimes a wrong address can be shown. In most
- cases it will however show the correct address if you have set in your
- correct node address in user 1, which is the number that is used for the
- calculation.
-
- F1·Pack F2·Memo F3·Frmt F4·Vir F5·GSet F6·Echo F7·VPic F8·40-L F9·Prn F0·NCD
-
-
- - 122 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ The Fax manager ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- -=> T E R M I N A T E F A X M A N A G E R <=-
-
- Introduction to the faxmanager
-
- The fax support in Terminate is one of the easiest and at the same time
- one of the most flexible and powerful fax-programs available.
- Most programs only allow you to send and receive and perhaps make a few
- cover pages. Terminate includes many more advanced features than these
- basic commands. It includes very advanced setup of almost everything,
- encryption of incoming faxes, incoming control, printing, scheduling and
- everything else you will need. On top of all this you can control the
- entire fax part from the command line, making Terminate a very useful
- tool.
-
- The fax manager menu
-
- ╒══════════╡ Fax manager ╞╕
- │ Receive faxes │
- │ Force receive │
- │ Polling fax │
- │ Send fax │
- │ Multi fax │
- │ Schedule fax │
- │ Convert │
- │ View faxes │
- │ Print files │
- │ File manager │
- │ Fax phonebook │
- │ View logfile │
- │ Encryption menu │
- │ Fax configuration │
- ╘═════════════════════════╛
-
- - 123 -
-
-
- Receive faxes
-
- ╒═════════════╤═════════════════════════════════════╤════╡ Fax receive ╞╕
- │ Device │ Async Modem COM2 │ │
- │ Chip │ ZyXEL │ │
- │ Class │ Class 2 │ │
- │ Model │ U1496S V 6.10 P │ │
- │ Revision │ U1496S V 6.10 P │ │
- │ Station ID │ TERMINATE │ │
- ├─────────────┴────┬─────────────────────┬──────────┴──────┬────────────┤
- │ Connection speed │ 14400 │ Page │ 1 │
- │ Remote ID │ TERMINATE │ Bytes received │ 17055 │
- │ Error correction │ Off │ CPS rate │ 1895 │
- │ High resolution │ Off │ Online │ 00.09 │
- │ Faxes received │ │ │ │
- │ File name │ 03120001.APF │ │ │
- ├──────────┬───────┴─────────────────────┴─────┬───────────┴────────────┤
- │ Fax path │ FAX\IN\ │ To print 1 │
- │ Printer │ PRN │ Printing (Paused) │
- │ Log │ StartReceive FAX\IN\03120001.APF │ Page of │
- ├──────────┼───────────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────┤
- │ │ │
- │ │ │
- │ │ Toggle printing │
- ├──────────┼────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ Status │ Getting page data │
- ╘══════════╧════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- This is an example of how it could look when you receive a fax. The
- receive mode is pretty automatic and you can only press ESC to exit or
- T to toggle printing.
-
- Force receive
-
- Pick up phone at once and start answering the fax NOW!
-
- Polling fax
-
- Send fax
-
- ╒══════╡ Send fax menu ╞╕
- │ Quick note │
- │ File selector │
- ╘═══════════════════════╛
-
- Quick note
-
- Send a small note fast. You will be asked if you want to delete the
- old note first (QUICK.TXT). If you answer no the note from last time
- will be used and you can continue where you left off last time.
-
- File selector
-
- Use the file selector to send any file you like. You can also edit the
- file from here. You can use select between PCX,DCX,TIFF,APF and normal
- text files. They will automatically be converted to fax format before
- sending.
-
- Pick phone entry
-
- - 124 -
-
-
- After you have selected quick note or file selector, you will be
- presented with the quick phonelist selector below.
-
- ╒═╡ TERMINAT.FON ╞════════════════════════╡ Pick phone entry ╞╕
- │ Enter to select Edit Add Manual number │
- ├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ # Name Number │
- ├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ 1 TurboPower, Terry Hughes 00 1 719 260 xxxx │
- │ 2 DAN BBS fax number 4264xxxx │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- A To quickly add a new number.
- E To edit the entry.
- M Manually enter TO/NUMBER (will remember last input).
- ENTER To select entry.
-
- Accept fax info
-
- ╒═════════════════════════╤════════════════╡ Send information ╞╕
- │ Send with cover page │ │
- │ Send without cover page │ │
- │ To │ TurboPower, Terry Hughes │
- │ Number │ 00 1 719 260 xxxx │
- │ From │ Bo Bendtsen │
- │ Current cover page │ COVER.TXT │
- ╘═════════════════════════╧════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Send with cover page / Send without cover page
-
- Transmit the fax with or without cover page.
-
- The picture below is an example of how a fax transfer could look like.
-
- ╒═════════════╤═════════════════════════════════════╤═══════╡ Fax send ╞╕
- │ Device │ Async Modem COM2 │ │
- │ Chip │ ZyXEL │ │
- │ Class │ Class 2 │ │
- │ Model │ U1496S V 6.10 P │ │
- │ Revision │ U1496S V 6.10 P │ │
- │ Station ID │ TERMINATE │ │
- ├─────────────┴────┬─────────────────────┬──────────┴──────┬────────────┤
- │ Connection speed │ 9600 │ Page │ 1 │
- │ Remote ID │ DAN BBS │ Bytes sent │ 6797 │
- │ Error correction │ Off │ CPS rate │ 1359 │
- │ High resolution │ Off │ Online │ 00.28 │
- │ Faxes received │ │ Progress │ 80% │
- │ File name │ FAX\OUT\QUICK.APF │ Costs kr │ 0,21 │
- ├──────────┬───────┴─────────────────────┴─────┬───────────┴────────────┤
- │ Fax path │ FAX\OUT\ │ │
- │ Printer │ │ │
- │ Log │ │ │
- ├──────────┼───────────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────┤
- │ From │ John Smith │
- │ To │ Bo Bendtsen 4362xxxx │
- │ Subject │ Hello there, how are you │
- ├──────────┼────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
- │ Status │ Sending page │
- ╘══════════╧════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- - 125 -
-
-
- To
-
- To-name used in cover page.
-
- Number
-
- The number to dial
-
- From
-
- From-name used in cover page, should normally be yours.
-
- Current cover page
-
- Change current cover page.
-
- Multi fax
-
- ╒════════════════════╤═════════════════════════╡ Multi fax ╞╕
- │ Start multifax │ │
- │ Phonelist │ MULTI.LST │
- │ File to fax │ MULTIFAX.TXT │
- │ Multi cover page │ COVER.TXT │
- │ Reset phonelist │ │
- │ Cost estimate │ │
- ╘════════════════════╧══════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Start multifax
-
- Start sending fax to all numbers in phonelist.
-
- Phonelist
-
- List of numbers to send the fax to.
-
- Examples:
-
- You want to buy an apartment or a house!
- You write a specific list of what you want and what you demand.
- You look up 5-10 real-estate companies in the phone directory and
- write in the numbers in this list.
- You start the multifax and let it handle the rest.
- After that you should get some phonecalls from some of these
- companies that have some the things you need.
- This can be used for almost all purposes, not only houses.
-
- You work in a company which every morning sends out faxes to
- sub-divisions about price changes or news.
- With this function you could make it automatic.
-
- File to fax
-
- File to fax to all the numbers.
-
- Multi cover page
-
- Cover page to use when sending multi-faxes.
-
- Reset phonelist
-
- - 126 -
-
-
- Remove all control codes from phonelist and allow you to start all over.
-
- Cost estimate
-
- Calculate approximately how much it will cost to send all faxes.
-
- Schedule fax
-
- Future feature, will soon be available.
-
- Convert
-
- Convert a PCX,DCX,TIF or textfile to APF (fax-format) or
- convert an APF file to PCX/DCX.
-
- View faxes
-
- View a fax or how any file will look after it was converted to a fax.
- This function will use the external fax-viewer.
-
- Print files
-
- Print a fax or any other file using the current printer.
-
- File manager
-
- Start up the file manager.
-
- Fax phonebook
-
- Edit the fax phonebook allowing you to check everything or import
- a phonelist etc.
-
- View logfile
-
- View logfile with the external or internal viewer.
-
- Encryption menu
-
- ╒════════════════════╤═══════════════════╡ Encrypt menu ╞╕
- │ Password │ │
- │ Auto encrypt │ Off │
- │ Encrypt any file │ │
- │ Decrypt any file │ │
- ╘════════════════════╧═══════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Password
-
- Password to use for auto encryption.
-
- Auto encrypt
-
- Encrypt files at once after they are received. If autoprint is enabled
- the fax will be encrypted after it has been printed.
-
- Encrypt any file
-
- Encrypt any file with your password. You can for example encrypt a secret
- file you need to send to a person and give him the password over the
-
- - 127 -
-
- phone, so you are sure it cannot be read by anyone else.
-
- Decrypt any file
-
- Decrypt any file with the current password. If you convert/send/print
- an encrypted file it will automatically be decrypted first.
-
- Fax configuration
-
- ╒════════════════════╤══════════════════════════╡ Fax configuration ╞╕
- │ Auto config │ │
- │ Fax device │ Default device │
- │ Class │ Detect │
- │ Receive class │ Class 2 │
- │ Fax BPS rate │ 9600 │
- │ Initstring │ ATM1V1X4 │
- │ Dial prefix │ ATDT │
- │ Error correction │ Off │
- │ Local ID │ TERMINATE │
- │ Fine resolution │ Off │
- │ Ring counter │ 1 │
- │ Send retries │ 3 │
- │ Retry delay │ 60 │
- │ Page width │ 1728 │
- │ Page header line │ Page $P of $N, Via Terminate: $D $T, │
- │ Pagesize & margins │ Page: 0 Top margin: 0 Left margin: 60 │
- │ Incoming control │ Off │
- │ Slow init │ On │
- │ Filenames & paths │ │
- │ Printer setup │ │
- ╘════════════════════╧═══════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Auto config
-
- Terminate will test which class to use and set default values. The first
- time you enter the fax menu, this function will be started.
-
- Fax device
-
- Which device to use whenever a fax is transmitted or received.
- Remember that many fax modems will not function with higher baudrates
- than 19200.
-
- Class
-
- Detect Will use highest class available in modem
- Class 1 Will force class 1
- Class 2 Will force class 2
- CAS Will force CAS
-
- Receive class
-
- When you already got a carrier in the hostmode or pointsystem the faxmodem
- needs to know which class to use for receiving.
-
- Fax bps rate
-
- Remember that 12000 and 14400 sometimes can course 2400 fax connect
- if other end only supports 2400
-
-
- - 128 -
-
- Initstring
-
- Normally you do not need to change this string. If you have a faxmodem
- that does not enable software flow control, you must look in your manual
- for information on doing this or choose the modem from the list here.
-
- Dial prefix
-
- Prefix to use for dialing when using command lines or multifax.
- If you send normal faxes using the phonebook, the prefix from the
- phonebook will be used.
-
- Error correction
-
- Some faxmodems have the ability of using error correction (ECM). Do not
- confuse this with MNP4-5 or v42bis. Terminate will detect if your faxmodem
- supports fax error correction and select this for you if available. Only
- turn it on if you are testing. It is most likely that it will not work
- for both receive and send if this toggle is turned on and your faxmodem
- does not support it.
-
- Local ID
-
- Which station ID to present to the other side. A number without spaces
- or hyphens (-) is the safest thing to use. If you are going to use
- a name instead. Use only A-Z and a-z. Do never use any international
- characters.
-
- Fine resolution
-
- Use FINE or NORMAL when converting/sending faxes.
- When using fine it will take twice the time to transmit the page, so
- only use that if you are sending something that needs to be of good
- quality or for example an application for a job.
-
- Ring counter
-
- Answer call on this ring number.
-
- Send retries
-
- How many times to retry if call was busy.
-
- Retry delay
-
- How many seconds to wait between each retry.
-
- Page width
-
- The normal width of a fax is 1728 pixels. If you for some reason want
- to send a fax with a width of 2048 pixels you must be aware that some
- fax machines will either scale or cut off the part over 1728.
-
- Page header line
-
- One each faxed page, this line will be the first. It will use the small
- font from the current fontfile and can be defined just as you like it.
-
- The default line is:
-
-
- - 129 -
-
- 'Page $P of $N, Via Terminate: $D $T, Sender: $I'
-
- And would for example be changed to:
-
- 'Page 1 of 2, Via Terminate: 14-Mar-95 18:44, Sender: TERMINATE'
-
- The $ strings that can be used are:
-
- $D Todays date in DD-MMM-YY format always 9 characters.
- $T Current time in HH:MM format
- $P Current page number
- $N Total number of pages
- $I Station ID
- $V Terminate version number
-
- $F From-name
- $R To-name
- $S Subject
-
- Pagesize & margins
-
- Use the length 0 in page size to allow endless pages.
- top/left margins are in pixels/dots. 50 equal appr 1/4 inch (0.6 cm)
-
- Incoming control
-
- Use INCOMING.CTL for controlling who are allowed to send faxes to you.
- Read the file for more information.
-
- Slow init
-
- Some older modems must send the fax commands with 2400 baud. This is
- most used by 2400/9600-Fax. 2400 baud modems, which can send fax with
- 9600 baud.
-
- Filenames & paths
-
- ╒════════════════════╤════════════════════╡ Filenames & paths ╞╕
- │ Fax path │ FAX\ │
- │ Fax receive path │ FAX\IN\ │
- │ Fax transmit path │ FAX\OUT\ │
- │ Font │ T-865.FNT │
- │ HP LaserJet font │ │
- │ CAS PCX Logo file │ LOGO.PCX │
- │ Cover page │ COVER.TXT │
- │ Fax phonebook │ TERMINAT.FON │
- ╘════════════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Fax path
-
- Where to place all files and utilities used for fax. Many datafiles
- must be placed in this directory and cannot be moved.
-
- Fax receive path
-
- Where to receive incoming faxes.
-
- Fax transmit path
-
- Where to store outgoing faxes.
-
- - 130 -
-
-
- Font
-
- Which font to use when converting from text.
-
- T-437.FNT Codepage 473 : United states
- T-850.FNT Codepage 850 : Multilingual (Latin I)
- T-860.FNT Codepage 860 : Portuguese
- T-863.FNT Codepage 863 : Canadian-French
- T-865.FNT Codepage 865 : Nordic
-
- Terminate will autodetect which codepage you are using and select the
- correct font for you. If you have not setup your computer for the correct
- codepage, you should choose the correct font yourself. You can safely
- delete the fonts you are not using. If your codepage is different from
- the ones available, then 437 will be selected as default.
- With the T-FONTED.EXE you can even create a new font or edit the font.
-
- HP LaserJet font
-
- Use an HP LaserJet font instead and the normal font.
- It must be a LaserJet font, it cannot be a DeskJet font.
- It must be bitmapped, not scaleable and the bitmap must not be
- compressed. Terminate scales each character in the font file to 20x16
- if using NORMAL mode and 20x32 if using FINE. You should try using
- fonts that have a fontsize of 6-10 otherwise it might mess up after
- scaling.
-
- CAS PCX Logo file
-
- ┌───────────────────┐
- │ Header date/time │
- ├───────────────────┤
- │ │
- │ PCX logo file │
- │ │
- ├───────────────────┤
- │Routing information│
- ├───────────────────┤
- │ │
- │ │
- │ Text │
- │ │
- │ │
- └───────────────────┘
-
- Cover page
-
- Each fax can have a defined fax cover send as first page.
- The default COVER.TXT will show you have to simply use this.
-
- $D Todays date in DD-MMM-YY format always 9 characters.
- $T Current time in HH:MM format
- $I Station ID
- $V Terminate version number
-
- $F From-name
- $R To-name
- $S Subject
-
-
- - 131 -
-
- Fax phonebook
-
- For your fax numbers you can have a seperate phonebook. If you only call
- a few BBS systems you can have all you phone numbers in the same book.
-
- Printer setup
-
- ╒════════════════════╤════════════════════════╡ Printer setup ╞╕
- │ Printer │ HP Laser Jet III (300 dpi / PCL5) │
- │ Printer path │ PRN │
- │ Auto print │ Off │
- │ Use scaling │ On │
- │ Suppress blanks │ Off │
- │ Print header │ On │
- ╘════════════════════╧═════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Printer
-
- Select which printer you want to use when printing faxes or other files.
- The following printers are directly supported:
-
- Epson FX (8 pins)
- Epson LQ (24 pins)
- HP Laser Jet II (150 dpi / PCL4)
- HP Laser Jet II (300 dpi / PCL4)
- HP Laser Jet III (150 dpi / PCL5)
- HP Laser Jet III (300 dpi / PCL5)
-
- Printer path
-
- You can specify the filename to use when printing or use
- PRN,LPT1,LPT2,LPT3
-
- Auto print
-
- Print out faxes at once after they are received.
-
- Use scaling
-
- Scale down faxes to fit page when printing.
-
- Suppress blanks
-
- Suppress blanks on HP LaserJet printers.
-
- Print header
-
- Print out a header with date/time etc. on top of each printed page.
-
- Fax command line switches
-
- Send a fax
-
- /FAX /SEND Filename Number-to-dial [To-user] [From-user]
-
- Filename is the full path to the file you want to fax.
- It can be an APF,PCX,DCX,TIFF format. If none of these extensions are
- used, Terminate will assume it is a DOS ASCII textfile.
- Number-to-dial cannot have any spaces.
- To-user and From-User must have the blanks replaced by underscores.
-
- - 132 -
-
- You cannot use From-user without To-user. The From-user will default
- to your normal From-user.
-
- Examples:
-
- /FAX /SEND C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT 4264xxxx
- /FAX /SEND C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT 4264xxxx Bo_Bendtsen
- /FAX /SEND C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT 4264xxxx John_Smith Bo_Bendtsen
-
- Errorlevels (Look in SENDFAX.BAT for an example of how to use those).
-
- 6 Error
- 5 Busy
- 4 Data Call
- 3 Voice Call
- 2 User abort
- 1 TimeOut.
- 0 Ok
-
- Receive faxes
-
- /FAX /RECEIVE
-
- Start up the receive part. With this command you could use Terminate
- as a fax machine and print out incoming faxes on your laserprinter.
-
- Send multifaxes
-
- /FAX /MULTI filename file-with-numbers /RESET
-
- Start the multifax function. The filename is the file to fax, it can
- be a APF,PCX,DCX,TIF or a textfile. The file-with-numbers is a list
- of numbers to call. /RESET will delete control codes first.
-
- Examples:
-
- /FAX /MULTI MULTIFAX.TXT MULTI.LST /RESET
- /FAX /MULTI INFO1094.TXT MULTI.LST
-
- Convert files
-
- /CONVERT filename
-
- If the file is an APF fax file then it will get converted to a PCX file.
- Otherwise everything will be converted to APF. If the extension is not
- PCX,DCX,TIF then a textfile will be assumed.
-
- Examples:
-
- /CONVERT C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT (Will create C:\AUTOEXEC.APF)
- /CONVERT C:\AUTOEXEC.APF (Will create C:\AUTOEXEC.PCX)
-
- Print files
-
- /PRINT filename
-
- When printing any file with this command, the file will first be converted
- to APF format and then sent to the printer. Do not use this command if you
- quickly want to print out a textfile. For this you should use:
- COPY textfile.ext PRN
-
- - 133 -
-
-
-
- - 134 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ CD audio player ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- Using the CDROM player allows you to put on some real music while you are
- downloading or doing other boring stuff.
-
- ╒═══════════════════╤══════════════╤═══════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ Play │ │Song Start Length Song Start Length │
- │ Stop │ ├────┬──────────────┬────┬──────────────┤
- │ Resume │ │ 1 │ 00:02 03:17 │ 21 │ │
- │ Next │ │ 2 │ 03:19 03:50 │ 22 │ │
- │ Previous │ │ 3 │ 07:09 03:58 │ 23 │ │
- │ Eject │ │ 4 │ 11:07 02:37 │ 24 │ │
- │ Lock CD door │ │ 5 │ 13:45 04:26 │ 25 │ │
- ├───────────────────┤ │ 6 │ 18:11 04:08 │ 26 │ │
- │ MSCDEX Version │ 2,21 │ 7 │ 22:20 05:01 │ 27 │ │
- │ CD in drive │ Yes │ 8 │ 27:22 03:16 │ 28 │ │
- │ Door locked │ No │ 9 │ 30:38 02:39 │ 29 │ │
- │ Raw and cooked │ Only cooked │ 10 │ 33:17 03:31 │ 30 │ │
- │ Data and Audio │ Yes │ 11 │ │ 31 │ │
- │ HSG and Red book │ Yes │ 12 │ │ 32 │ │
- │ Audiomanipulation │ No │ 13 │ │ 33 │ │
- │ Volume size │ 36:49.00 │ 14 │ │ 34 │ │
- ├───────────────────┤ │ 15 │ │ 35 │ │
- │ Track │ 1 │ 16 │ │ 36 │ │
- │ Track start │ 00:02 │ 17 │ │ 37 │ │
- │ Total track time │ 03:15 │ 18 │ │ 38 │ │
- │ Track time │ 00:30 Index │ 19 │ │ 39 │ │
- │ Track time left │ 02:45 │ 20 │ │ 40 │ │
- │ Copyrighted track │ Yes └────┘ └────┘ │
- ╘═══════════════════╧══════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- This is a record by a world famous Danish heavy metal band called D.A.D.
-
- Play
-
- Starts playing from a number and the rest of the album.
-
- Stop
-
- Stop playing (mute).
-
- Resume
-
- Resume playing the track where you stopped it.
-
- Next
-
- Skip rest of track and play the next
-
- Previous
-
- Play the previous track
-
- Eject
-
-
- - 135 -
-
- Eject CD from your CDROM.
-
- Lock CD door
-
- Lock/unlock the CD inside the CDROM, so nobody can borrow the CD.
-
- MSCDEX Version
-
- MSCDEX.EXE is a program supplied by MicroSoft for making standard calls to
- CDROMs. MSCDEX means MicroSoft CD extension.
- You need at least version 2.00 for using this player.
-
- CD in drive
-
- Did Terminate detect a CD in the drive?
-
- Door locked
-
- Did you lock the CDROM door?
-
- Raw and cooked
-
- Does you drive support raw and cooked reading modes? (Uh?)
-
- Data and Audio
-
- Does your CD support both audio and data tracks?
-
- HSG and Red book
-
- Does your CDROM support High Sierra May 28th format and the
- ISO-9660 version of the High Sierra format (Red Book)?
-
- Audiomanipulation
-
- Does your CDROM support audio channel manipulation?
-
- Volume size
-
- Total playing time of CD.
-
- Track
-
- Which track is currently being played.
-
- Track start
-
- Where on the CD does the track start.
-
- Total track time
-
- How long the track is.
-
- Track time
-
- How much of the track has been played.
-
- Track time left
-
- How much playing time is left of the track.
-
- - 136 -
-
-
- Copyrighted track
-
- Is the track copyrighted.
-
- Index
-
- All music CD's have index marks when starting and stopping a track,
- Terminate will shortly flash the Index indicator when it meets an index.
-
-
- - 137 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ International information ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- International information
-
- This part of the manual will have all kind of different international
- information. We will try to gather as much information as possible and
- put in here, but please if you have any suggestions for additional
- information you think could be useful for a lot of people, please contact
- a registration site.
-
- Unit of measurement
-
- metre (m) for length
- kilogram (kg) for weight
- second (s) for time
- ampere (A) for current intensity
- kelvin (K) for absolute temperature (absolute zero -273.15 Celsius)
- candela (cd) units of luminous intensity
- mol (mol) for quantity of material
-
- The units are defined with the biggest possible accuracy compared to
- imperishable sizes. For example the metre is defined as the length
- of the way the light runs in af 1/299792458 second. A second is defined
- as 919263631770 times the characteristic atomic time for caesium-133
- (cesium).
-
- To make the daily use more easy the following measurement are used:
-
- celsius (C) unit of temperature
- coulomb (C ) unit of quantity electricity
- farad (F ) unit of electrical capacity
- henry (H) unit of electrical inductance
- hertz (Hz) unit of frequency
- joule (J ) unit of work or energy
- liter (l) unit of cubic content
- lumen (lm) unit of luminous flux
- lux (lx) unit of illumination
- newton (N ) unit of force
- ohm (O_) unit of electrical resistance
- tesla (T) unit of magnetic inductance
- volt (V ) unit of electric potential
- watt (W ) unit of electric power
- weber (W) unit of magnetic flux
-
- Numeric sizes
-
- exa (E) 10 18 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 times
- peta (P) 10 15 1 000 000 000 000 000 times
- tera (T) 10 12 1 000 000 000 000 times
- giga (G) 10 9 1 000 000 000 times
- mega (M) 10 6 1 000 000 times
- kilo (k) 10 3 1 000 times
- hecto (h) 10 2 100 times
- deka (da) 10 1 10 times
- deci (d) 10 -1 0.1 times
-
- - 138 -
-
- centi (c) 10 -2 0.01 times
- milli (m) 10 -3 0.001 times
- micro (y_) 10 -6 0.000 001 times
- nano (n) 10 -9 0.000 000 001 times
- pico (p) 10 -12 0.000 000 000 001 times
- femto (f) 10 -15 0.000 000 000 000 001 times
- atto (a) 10 -18 0.000 000 000 000 000 001 times
-
-
- Linear measure
-
- The Metric System
-
- 1 millimetre (mm) = 0.001 m
- 1 centimetre (cm) = 0.01 m
- 1 decimetre (dm) = 0.1 m
- 1 dekametre (dam) = 10 m
- 1 hectometre (dam) = 100 m
- 1 kilometre (km) = 1000 m
-
- Old English and American systems
-
- 1 inch = 2.54 cm
- 1 foot (12 inches) = 30.48 cm
- 1 yard (3 feet) = 91.44 cm
- 1 fathom (2 yeards) = 1.83 m
- 1 (statute) mile (1760 yards) = 1.609 km
-
- Old Danish measures (The metric was laid down by law in 1977)
-
- 1 tomme = 2.615 cm
- 1 fod (12 tommer) = 31.385 cm
- 1 alen (2 fod) = 62.771 cm
- 1 favn (3 alen) = 1.883 m
- 1 mil (4000 favne) = 7.532 km
-
- Old Swedish measures
-
- 1 tum = 2.47 cm
- 1 tvärhand = 8-10 cm
- 1 fot = 29.7 cm
- 1 aln = 59.4 cm
- 1 gutealn = 64 cm
- 1 famn = 1.78 m
- 1 kyndelsmil = 1 600 m
- 1 fjärdingsväg = 2 672 m
- 1 rast = 5 016 m
- 1 lantmil = 10 689 m
-
- Other
-
- 1 geographical mile = 7.532.48 m
- 1 nautical mile = 1.852 m
- 1 Swedish mile = 10 km
- 1 Verst (Russian) = 1066.78 m
-
- Square measure
-
- The Metric System
-
-
- - 139 -
-
- 1 square meter m2 = 10000 cm2
- 1 are (a) = 100 m2
- 1 hectare (ha) = 10000 m2
- 1 square kilometre (km2) = 100 ha
-
- Old English and American systems
-
- 1 square inch = 6.8406 cm2
- 1 square foot = 0.0929 m2
- 1 square yard = 0.8361 m2
- 1 acre (4840 square yards) = 0.4047 ha
-
- Old Danish measures
-
- 1 kvadrat-alen = 0.3940 m2
- 1 t¢nde land (14000 alen) = 0.5516 ha
- 1 kvadratmil = 56.7383 km2 (10285 5/7 t¢nder land)
-
- Cubic measure
-
- The Metric System
-
- 1 litre (l) = 1000 cm3
- 1 cubic metre (m3) = 1000 l
- 1 hectolitre = 100 l
-
- English and American system
-
- 1 pint
- UK: = 0.568 l
- US: = 0.473 l
- 1 gallon (4 quarts=8 pints)
- UK: = 4.546 l
- US: = 3.785 l
- 1 bushel
- UK: = 36.37 l
- US: = 35.24 l
- 1 cubic foot = 0.0283 m3
- 1 cubic yard = 0.7646 m3
-
- Old Danish measures
-
- 1 pægl = 0.242 l
- 1 pot (4 pægle) = 0.966 l
- 1 kubikfod = 0.0309 m3
- 1 t¢nde = 1.3912 hl
-
- Old Swedish measures
-
- 1 famn ved = 3.14 m3
- 1 stor famn ved = 4.22 m3
- 1 parm hö = 7.15 m3
- 1 kvadratfot = 882 cm2
- 1 tunnland = 4936 m2
- 1 kanna = 2.6 l
- 1 kappe = 4.6 l
- 1 fjärding = 18.32 l
- 1 skäppa = 36.6 l
- 1 spann = 73.3 l
- 1 tunna = 146.6 l
-
- - 140 -
-
- 1 kvarter = 32.7 cl
- 1 Stop = 1.3 l
- 1 Fjärding = 15.6 l
- 1 Ankare = 39.25 l
- 1 tunna = 125.6 l
-
- Weight
-
- The Metric System
-
- 1 milligram (mg) = 0.001 g
- 1 centigram (cg) = 0.01 g
- 1 decigram (dg) = 0.1 g
- 1 dekagram (dag) = 10 g
- 1 hectogram (hg) = 100 g
- 1 kilogram (kg) = 1000 g
-
- English and American systems
-
- 1 grain (gr) = 0.0648 g
- 1 ounce (480 grains) (oz) = 28.350 g
- 1 pound (16 ounces) (lb) = 0.4536 kg
- 1 hundredweight
- UK: 112 pounds (cwt) = 50.8 kg
- US: 100 pounds (cwt) = 45.36 kg
- 1 long ton
- UK: 2240 pounds = 1016 kg
- 1 short ton
- US: 2000 pounds = 907.18 kg
- 1 stone (14 lbs) = 6.35 kg
-
- Old Danish measures
-
- 1 kvint = 5.0 kg
- 1 lod = 15.625 g
- 1 pund (100 kvint)(32 lodder) = 500 g
- 1 lispund (16 pund) = 8 kg
- 1 centner (100 pund) = 50 kg
-
- Old Swedish measures
-
- 1 korn = 42.5 mg
- 1 kvinting = 3.32 g
- 1 ort = 4.25 g
- 1 lod = 13.28 g
- 1 skålpund = 425 g
- 1 skeppspund = 170 kg
- 1 bast sill = 24 st sillar (sill is a fish)
- 1 val sill = 80 st sillar
- 1 bunt sill = 100 st sillar
-
- Temperature
-
- Fahrenheit = Celcius * 9 / 5 + 32
- Celsius = (Fahrenheit - 32) * 5 / 9
-
- Decimal/Hexadecimal/Binary numeric systems
-
- Sometimes it is hard to know how you calculate from one system to another.
- Small number are easy, but large numbers are much harder. It is important
-
- - 141 -
-
- to understand how these numbers work if you are doing a little programming
- yourself. If you don't want to be able of doing things manually, buy a
- calculator that can convert for you.
-
- Decimal-10 Hexadecimal $-16 Binary-2
- ──────────────────────────────────────────────
- 0 0 0
- 1 1 1
- 2 2 10
- 3 3 11
- 4 4 100
- 5 5 101
- 6 6 110
- 7 7 111
- 8 8 1000
- 9 9 1001
- 10 A 1010
- 11 B 1011
- 12 C 1100
- 13 D 1101
- 14 E 1110
- 15 F 1111
- 16 10 10000
- 100 64 1100100
- 255 FF 1111111
- 256 100 10000000
- 1024 400 10000000000
- 4096 1000 1000000000000
- 65535 FFFF 1111111111111111
- 65536 10000 10000000000000000
- ──────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- To convert from one system to another there are a few tricks you
- can use.
-
- Hexadecimal (hex) -> Binary
-
- Example: $12FA -> ? __12FA_ Hex
- / / | \
- / | | \
- 0001 0010 1111 1010 Binary
-
- Result = 0001001011111010 (You can loose the leading zeroes)
-
- Take each hex number and convert to a 4 bit binary number. Then put all
- together in one long row, strip leading zeroes. That's it, pretty simple.
-
- Binary -> Hexadecimal (hex)
-
- Example: 1010011110 -> ?
-
- Divide into blocks of 4 from behind 1. 1110
- 2. 1001 1110
- 3. 10 1001 1110
- Add leading zeroes 4. 0010 1001 1110
- Convert each block to hex. 5. 2 8+1 8+4+2
- Result 6. $29E
-
- Decimal -> Hexadecimal
-
-
- - 142 -
-
- No easy way, so we 'just' divide.
-
- Example: 48 -> ?
-
- 47 / 16 = 2 <- 1st number ----- \
- 2x16 = 32 |
- Remainder = 47-32 = 15 |
- 15 / 1 = 15 = F <- 2nd number |
- |
- Result = $2F |
- | 16^0 1
- Example: 32891 -> ? | 16^1 16
- \ ---> 16^2 256
- 32891 / 4096 = 8 <- 1st number 16^3 4096
- 8x4096 = 32768 16^4 65536
- Remainder = 32891-32768 = 123 16^5 1048576
- 123 / 256 = 0 <- 2nd number / -> 16^6 16777216
- 0x256 = 0 | .
- Remainder = 123-0 = 123 ----- / .
- 123 / 16 = 7 <- 3rd number
- 7x16 = 112
- Remainder = 123-112 = 11 ^
- 11 / 1 = 11 = B <- 4th number |
- |
- Result = $807B |
- |
- Hexadecimal -> Decimal
- |
- This way is much faster than the other |
- way around. |
- |
- Example: $1A4F |
- |||1 |
- ||16 ___________________________________________ /
- |256
- 4096
-
- (A) (F)
- Calculation: 1 x 4096 + 10 x 256 + 4 x 16 + 15 x 1 = 6735
-
- Decimal -> Binary
-
- No easy way, so we 'just' divide.
-
- Example: 147 -> ?
-
- 147 / 128 = 1 <- 1st number 2^0 1
- 1x128 = 128 2^1 2
- Remainder = 147-128 = 19 2^2 4
- 19 / 64 = 0 <- 2nd number 2^3 8
- 19 / 32 = 0 <- 3rd number ---------------> 2^4 16
- 19 / 16 = 1 <- 4th number 2^5 32
- 1x16 = 16 2^6 64
- Remainder = 19-16 = 3 2^7 128
- 3 / 8 = 0 <- 5th number 2^8 256
- 3 / 4 = 0 <- 6th number .
- 3 / 2 = 1 <- 7th number .
- 1x2 = 2
- Remainder = 3-2 = 1 ^
- 1 / 1 = 1 <- 8th number |
-
- - 143 -
-
- |
- Result = 10010011 |
- |
- Binary -> Decimal
- |
- Example: 10110101 -> ? |
- |||||||1 |
- ||||||2 |
- |||||4 |
- ||||8 |
- |||16 ---------------------------------- /
- ||32
- |64
- 128
-
- Calculation: 1x128 + 0x64 + 1x32 + 1x16 + 0x8 + 1x4 + 0x2 + 1x1 = 181
-
-
- - 144 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ End of manual ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- We think Terminate is the final terminal.
-
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- Information about SHAREWARE/LITE/PLUS versions
-
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- SHAREWARE versions:
-
- We hope you'll agree and encourage you to share copies of the evaluation
- version of Terminate with others - but subject to the following
- limitations:
-
- ALL the files in GIVEAWAY\ must be distributed. The individual files must
- also be complete and unmodified and without the addition of other files.
-
- Terminate may not be `bundled' with hardware without written permission
- from SerWiz Comm. Cost effective licences for Terminate LITE are available
- for modem manufacturers/distributors:
- SerWiz Comm Fax +44 171 394 1230
- (or nearest registration site)
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- LITE versions:
-
- The LITE versions are only delivered with modems and hardware.
- You cannot re-sell LITE versions.
-
- Cost effective licences for Terminate LITE are available for modem
- manufacturers/distributors:
- SerWiz Comm Fax +44 171 394 1230
- (or nearest registration site)
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- PLUS versions:
-
- PLUS versions are retail software. For more information on buying PLUS
- versions, please send a fax to:
- SerWiz Comm Fax +44 171 394 1230
- (or nearest registration site)
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- PROFESSIONAL versions:
-
- Professional versions are only available through T-REGS the electronical
- registration site or through a local registration site.
-
- Succinctly: no one other than SerWiz Comm and the authorised registration
- sites may charge money for TERMINATE PROFESSIONAL.
-
-
- - 145 -
-
- Site licence deals are available from your local registration site or
- directly from SerWiz Comm. Site licence deals are only authorized when you
- purchase 50 or more copies. Exceptions could be made under special
- circumstances, but only if you deal directly with SerWiz Comm.
-
- SerWiz Comm Fax +44 171 394 1230
-
- ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
-
- EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
-
- IN NO EVENT WILL STRATHRORY SYSTEMS LIMITED, SERWIZ COMM OR ASSOCIATES BE
- LIABLE TO YOU FOR ADDITIONAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST
- SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
- USE OR INABILITY TO USE TERMINATE OR UTILITIES FOR TERMINATE, EVEN IF WE
- HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-
- Special thanks
- ──────────────
-
- Bjarne Duelund For testing and utility-programming, running DAN BBS
- Bj¢rn L¢ndahl Information on how the point system should work
- Carsten Milling Language consultant
- Colin O'Brien For making the final startup screen
- Erik Andersen For making GIF source codes for us.
- Finn Johansen 1000 ideas. (At least) and moral support
- Gregory P. Smith For making the Avatar/Ansi module
- Jesper Larsen For all his very good ideas
- Keld R. Hansen Sourcecodes and information
- Lars Nyby For making nice tunes
- Mads Storm Garf, Barp, Gnyf etc.
- Michael Rochman It is expensive calling from USA
- Mike Dickson For helping with OS/2, Author of Panther
- Pia M¢ller For tolerating Bo Bendtsen's endless coding hours
- Peter Krag-Sander For helping with graphics support (soon!)
- Preben Eriksen For making Terminate demos
- Shin Do Juku My martial arts club, Shin Do Ken Kempo (Kungfu)
- S¢ren Ager Sourcecodes and mailer information
- Thomas Bj¢rk For ideas, bugfixes, complaints, running DAN BBS
- TurboPower For making Async professional/Object professional
-
- Special thank you to the special Gamma test team:
-
- Andreas Streit Host, TerMail, Fax
- Andy Roberts OS/2 tester. Finally made the Zoom setup with Steve
- Dietmar Kneidl Organizing the German testers
- Gerald Himmelein Translating, testing, pushing people around
- Hans-Georg Joepgen Fixing PS/2 problems
- Harald Kamm Testing faxmanager, file transfer and much much more
- Ludger Wilde Testing TerMai, Hostmode, configuration and more
- Olaf Thormaehlen Pointsystem and emulations
- Steve Stacher Keeping the conferences clean and probing the mailsystem
-
- And all others that have ever tested Terminate.
-
- - and lots of other people for supporting this product. We will never
- claim that all the ideas are our own - the main reason Terminate is so
- feature-packed is because of all the users (maybe even you?) who have
- demanded and suggested ever more options and features.
-
-
- - 146 -
-
- Trademarks
-
- The following trademarks are owned by Strathrory Systems Limited:
-
- Terminate Registered Trademark
- The Final Terminal Trademark
- TerMail Trademark
- VISIBLE FAST Trademark
- T-Fax Trademark
- The Final Fax Manager Trademark
- PreScription Trademark
- T-List Trademark
- SmartNote Trademark
-
- Other names or products containing the word TERMINATE, can only be used
- with written permission. SerWiz Comm will decide which ideas,
- conference's etc. which will be allowed to use the name Terminate or
- contain the word Terminate. All unoffically and local Terminate
- conferences must obtain a permit before 1. October 1994 to be allowed
- to continue the use of the trademark. If you are a moderator for a
- Terminate conference and do not have the permission, please send
- a fax to SerWiz Comm if you want to apply.
-
- Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks
- of their respective holders.
-
- The story about the Terminate trademark
-
- The Terminate trademark was an idea of Bo Bendtsen when he was beginning
- to plan his terminal program. He had programmed a little nameless terminal
- and was looking for a good name. It would have to be related to modems,
- terminal software or something similar. One day while he was expanding the
- network of his BBS system, Bo picked up a network terminator
- (50 ohms ethernet), looked at it and pondered:
-
- 'Network terminator. No... YES... that's it: Terminate.'
-
-
- - 147 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Information for blind people ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- The name of this document is BLIND.DOC. It can be found in the DOCS
- directory of Terminate.
-
- This file contains only information for people that cannot see.
-
- Because we got a lot of personal requests from blind people, we decided
- to create a few extra features which will help you to use Terminate even
- faster and more easily than any other terminal program we know.
-
- Most of you use some kind of speech device which only can detect BIOS
- writes. Terminate will use direct screen writes in menus and BIOS calls
- in terminal mode. You can choose to use BIOS calls all the time.
-
- If you select Blind Support under installation the following will be
- selected:
-
- Sound is turned on giving you a sound when popping up or down a window
- Key click is turned on giving you a click every time you press a key
- Only menus will use direct screen writes
- Cursor will be forced on all the time so your helper can see the cursor
- All sounds are turned on
- Passwords will not be hidden
- No automatic passwords will be generated
- The Blind Transfer window will be used for transfering files
- The File Manager will default to only one window
- Some extra sounds have been added
- In submenus all the background windows will be removed before showing
- the new window.
-
- With blind support enabled, Terminate will always turn on the cursor so
- if you have a helper he/she can tell you if the cursor position was
- wrong and ask me to correct the error. This function also allows you to
- press CONTROL ENTER and then move the cursor. This will move the cursor
- position to the first position in the helpline at the bottom of the
- screen, allowing you faster speech access. If no help is found in a
- menu, when the menuline selector is used, then a beep will be played:
- high tone, low tone.
-
- To make things easier when transferring files, instead of the normal
- full screen file transfer menu yours have been cut down to the actual
- information you need. A sample picture is shown below. This window
- starts at 1,1 upper left corner and the cursor is placed just before the
- bytes transferred.
-
- The menu looks like the following lines:
-
- ╒════════════╡ Blind transfer ╞╕
- │ Filename DANBBS.ARJ │
- │ Filesize 2153297 │
- │ 75% 8192 │
- │ CPS │
- │ H Hangup No S Skip file │
- ╘══════════════════════════════╛
-
- - 148 -
-
-
- Menu finished.
-
- Line 1: The name on the file.
- Line 2: The size of the file.
- Line 3: How many percent and how many bytes that are transfered.
- Line 4: Chars per second, speed of transfer.
- Line 5: S for skipping the rest of file, h for hanging up after transfer.
-
- The message reader for Terminate is called TerMail. When starting up
- this editor you could give the parameter /BLIND to enable special sounds
- and features. If you call up TerMail from Terminate Alt-F7,L then this
- parameter will automatically be added if blind support is enabled.
-
- In the filemanager you can press Q for Quiet, which will disable the
- entire left side and make it easier to view the files.
-
- list of hot-key in terminate:
-
- change configuration (alt-o)
-
- s = screen and collors
- c = communikations setup
- g = general option
- t = toggels
- m = modem and dialing
- f = filenames and paths
- p = protocol options
- e = emulation/keyboard setup
- h = host settings
- l = login strings/scripts
- u = user(iemsi/security
- n = point system
- a = cost management
- r = registration info
- w = write setup to disk
-
- phonebook (alt-d)
-
- ins = insert entry
- del = delete entry
- a = add entry
- e = edit/view
- d = dial numbers
- m = manual dial
- f = find
- s = sort entries
- i = import
- p = change phonebooks
- o = other functions
- g = global change
- v = save now
- l = voice call
- c = copy or move entries
- t = edit capture file
- n = edit note file
- w = show warndays
- tagging = space, plus (+), minus (-), stat (*)
-
- phonebook edit (alt-d,e)
-
- - 149 -
-
-
- s = system name
- p = phonenumber
- d = device
- u = user profile
- w = password
- o = opening hours
- t = terminal
- x = dial prefix
- f = dial suffix
- c = com information
- a = autologin
- l = downloadpath
- n = notefile
-
- pointsystem (alt-f7)
-
- c = call boss
- m = call system
- s = send files
- r = file request
- k = kill mail
- t = auto requests
- p = pickup mail
- a = send ak's
- z = zoom mail
-
- e = mail address
- n = send messager
- h = change mail
- l = mail editor
- i = import
- x = export
-
- ter mail
- a = areafix
- d = delete
- e = edit
- esc = exit
- enter = area
-
- These features was made with help from many blind persons. In the future
- our blind contact person will help us to support these features. If you
- have any special needs, please send a letter to the following person and
- he will help us doing what you want or need:
-
- H.C. Andersen
- Fregatten 14
- 5330 Munkebo
- Denmark
- Fidonet 2:236/111.101
-
-
- - 150 -
-
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Additional Features when you upgrade to the PROFESSIONAL version ░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- ■ Reminder goes away
- The annoying 'Please consider registering' picture will not be displayed
- after a random period anymore.
-
- ■ Phonebook report
- You will be able to generate a report containing time used, KB
- transferred, how much money you have used every month for the last 12
- months etc. and a printout of the phonebook, which tells how much each
- entry has cost you.
-
- ■ Manual mail in the Point system, which allows you to send or request
- files with non-predefined systems. You can then call manually or a number
- from the phonebook and, when the connection is made and we know which
- NODE we have on the other end, the MANUMAIL.* will be renamed to the
- correct filename like 236/111 (DAN BBS) and MANUMAIL.REQ will be renamed
- to 00EC006F.REQ (00EC=236 006F=111), before the file is sent - otherwise
- the other system will not accept a filerequest, if it gets the wrong
- filename.
-
- ■ Auto Request, which allows you to specify 10 phonenumbers to try
- requesting files from. When the files are selected in the Tagmenu, the
- Raid system will call up the numbers in sequence and try requesting the
- files. It will keep on requesting until you have all the files demanded
- or escape.
-
- ■ Turn off the opening/closing screens, for faster startup/closedown.
-
- ■ Select if you want DAN BBS at the top when creating new phonebooks.
-
- ■ Capture keystrokes
- When you use the capture function, then you can record all keys typed at
- your keyboard. Type SECRET will capture:
-
- [S,83][E,69][C,67][R,82][E,69][T,84].
-
- This gives you first the char pressed and then its ascii value. This will
- be a very useful feature when debugging scripts, etc. Please do not abuse
- this feature by stealing your best friends' password!
-
- ■ Ask device at startup
- Some people use several devices. It could be different modems or ISDN-
- lines. When this function is turned on, Terminate will ask you which
- device you want at startup.
-
- ■ You will be able to simulate Portal of Power when requesting files.
-
- ■ You can put security passwords on configuration, phonebook changes, point
- system, screen blanker and file manager.
-
- ■ Create secondary encrypted logfiles. Mostly for network administrators.
-
- ■ Network lock. Lock TERMINAT.EXE to a network path, so it cannot be moved.
-
- - 151 -
-
- Also lock the EXE-file to a certain keyfile which can be placed anywhere.
-
- ■ The VISIBLE FAST (tm) access menu, when pressing Alt-V or mouse click in
- the lower right corner.
-
- ■ The SmartNote will have very fast and good searching on Alt-F and Alt-Z.
-
- ■ TerMail will write PROFESSIONAL in PID and insert a /Pro in the tearline.
-
- ■ Every function in the FAX manager will work
-
- ■ All other features that pop up the window saying "Please upgrade"
-
- ■ You help support future development of this user-supported program.
-
- ■ You are allowed to use the program for more than 21 days.
-
-
- - 152 -
-
- ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
- │ ░░░░ Licence agreement ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
- └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-
- Notice of COPYRIGHT and EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
-
-
- Under local laws and according to the relevant international conventions,
- ALL versions of Terminate are copyright 1992-94 of Strathrory Systems Ltd.
-
- Worldwide distributor SerWiz Comm
-
-
- All rights reserved.
-
-
- IN NO EVENT WILL STRATHRORY SYSTEMS LIMITED, SERWIZ COMM OR ASSOCIATES BE
- LIABLE TO YOU FOR ADDITIONAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST
- SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
- USE OR INABILITY TO USE TERMINATE OR UTILITIES FOR TERMINATE, EVEN IF WE
- HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-
- Succintly: By using this program, you agree not to hold Strathrory Systems
- Limited, SerWiz Comm or associates responsible for anything other than
- taking up a lot of disk space.
-
-
- SHAREWARE LICENCE
-
- SerWiz Comm hereby grants to all a licence terminable at 7 days notice to
- distribute copies of the Shareware evaluation version of Terminate subject
- to the following limitations:
-
- ALL the files must be distributed. The individual files must also be
- complete and unmodified and without the addition of other files.
-
- Terminate may NEVER be sold or distributed for profit or anticipated
- profit without the written permission of the worldwide distributor.
-
- Terminate may not be `bundled' with hardware without written permission
- from the worldwide distributor. Cost-effective licences for Terminate LITE
- are available for modem manufacturers and distributors:
-
- fax +44 171 394 1230
-
- Succinctly: no one other than SerWiz Comm and the authorised national
- Registration Sites may charge money for Terminate.
-
- Neither a personalised Key File, Terminate Lite, Terminate Professional,
- Terminate-f-W, Terminate NT or Terminate OS/2 may be copied (other than
- for backup purposes) or distributed.
-
-
- OFFER OF LICENCE
-
-
- SerWiz Comm and associates hereby offers you, the reader of this offer,
-
- - 153 -
-
- a licence to use Terminate for 21 days for evaluation purposes only in
- return for your agreement to report to SerWiz Comm directly or indirectly
- any bugs found or suggestions for improvements.
-
-
- If you decline this offer, please do not use Terminate.
-
-
- *
-
-
-
-
-
- -=> P R I Z E D R A W R E G I S T R A T I O N <=-
-
- We think Terminate is the final terminal.
-
- To encourage you to share copies of this evaluation version of Terminate
- with others we now have a little incentive for you:
-
- Every month beginning 1 January 1994, the Electronic Regsite will send
- fifty pounds sterling (£50) to some lucky Terminate users!
-
- But who is eligible? When people register at the Electronic Regsite
- we now have the ability to detect the two people who previously copied the
- distribution files to the person upgrading to Terminate PROFESSIONAL.
-
- It is these two previous users (our `distribution team') that qualify for
- free money!
-
- Winners are announced in Terminate Tech Support conferences
-
- To join the list of eligible prizewinners, just
- spread Terminate around - the distribution files
- they need are in the \GIVEAWAY directory.....
-
-
- You MUST have used your real name upon installation since the prize will be
- sent to that address - so please make be sure that you filled in the
- information correctly when you installed Terminate!
- If you later decide to register and pay for Terminate, this information
- will be used to generate your personalised Key File. (You can't register
- Terminate under an alias like Donald Duck).
-
- To register for an organisation also give the name of the person using the
- program. eg: Users Name (title and firm
- if applicable): Sir Oliver Smith / The Hunting Society
-
-
-